Samsung Centralized Workflow Solution Scx 6545N Users Manual SCX6545N Guide_EN

SCX-6545N to the manual 579ba052-9e53-4763-b9ec-50b3ed7b3a73

: Samsung Samsung-Centralized-Workflow-Solution-Scx-6545N-Users-Manual-275197 samsung-centralized-workflow-solution-scx-6545n-users-manual-275197 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 190

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SCX-6545N Series

Multi Functional Printer
User’s Guide

imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.

features of your new laser MFP
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing
functions.
With the machine, you can:

SPECIAL FEATURES
Some features are optional. Please check the
specifications sections. (See "Specifications" on
page 126.)
Print with excellent quality and speed
• You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi Effective
output. See Software section.
• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 43 ppm and
letter-sized paper at up to 45 ppm.
• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized paper at
up to 38 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to 40 ppm.
Handle many different types of printable material
• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead, envelopes,
labels, transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards, and
heavy paper. The multi-purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets
of plain paper.
• The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray support
plain paper in various sizes.
• The 2,100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in
various sizes.
Create professional documents
• Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with
words, such as “Confidential”. See Software section.
• Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your
document are magnified and printed across the sheet of
paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. See
Software section.
• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain
paper. See Software section.
Save time and money
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single
sheet of paper.
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper
(double-sided printing). See Software section.
Expand your machine’s capacity
• Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their
memory. (See "Installing a memory DIMM" on page 123.)
• A Network interface enables network printing. Your
machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/100/
1000 Base TX.

1

•

Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3
Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing.
.

* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3
© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved.
Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and OneImage are
trademarks of Zoran Corporation.

* 136PS3 fonts
Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.
Print in various environments
• You can print with various operating system such as
Windows, Linux and Macintosh systems.
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a
network interface.
Copy originals in several formats
• You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided
document production.
• There are special functions to erase punch holes, staple
marks and newspaper background.
• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and
enhanced at the same time.
Scan the originals and send it right away
• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using,
E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.
• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email
addresses and send the scanned image immediately.
• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG,
TIFF and PDF formats.
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)
• You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also
send the fax to several stored destinations.
• After the transmission, the machine may print out the fax
reports according to the setting.
Use USB memory devices
If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in various
ways with your machine.
• You can scan documents and save them to the device.
• You can directly print data stored to the device.
• You can back up data and restore backup files to the
machine’s memory.
IPv6
This machine supports IPv6.

FEATURES BY MODELS
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs – from printing and copying, to more advanced networking solutions for your business.
Basic features of this machine include;
FEATURES

SCX-6545N

USB 2.0
USB Memory
DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)
Hard Disk
Network Interface Enthernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN
Duplex (2-sided) printing
FAX

O

Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)

O

Stand

O

( : Included, O: Optional, Blank: Not Available)

ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice
users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine.
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide.
CONVENTION

DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLE

Bold

Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine.

Start

Note

Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine
function and feature.

.The date format may differ from
country to country

Caution

Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical
damage or malfunction.

Do not touch the green underside of
the print cartridge.

>

Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order.
The example means; press Copy from the Main screen, press the Advanced tab,
and then press Clone Copy.

Copy > the Advanced tab > Clone Copy

Footnote

Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase.

a. pages per minute

(See page 1 for more
information)

Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information.

(See page1 for more information)

2

FINDING MORE INFORMATION
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.
Quick Install Guide

Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.

Online User’s Guide

Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your
machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.
This user’s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in
various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.

Network Website

You can set the network environment from your computer using network-managing programs, such as SetIP, SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service, AnyWeb Print etc. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service will be convenient for network administrators who need to manage many
machines simultaneously. AnyWeb Print helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer
easily. You can download the SyncThru™ Web Admin Service or AnyWeb Print on http://solution.samsungprinter.com. SetIP program
is provided in the software CD.

Printer Driver Help

Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a
printer driver help screen, click Help from the printer properties dialog box.

Samsung website

If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsungprinter.com.

3

safety information
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS
What the icons and signs in this user manual mean:
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
CAUTION

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your laser MFP, follow these basic safety
precautions:
Do NOT attempt.
Do NOT disassemble.YTU
Do NOT touch.
Follow directions explicitly.
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.
Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.

These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others.
Please follow them explicitly.
After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
1. Read and understand all instructions.
2. Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.
3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine.
4. If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.
5. Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only
a damp cloth for cleaning.
6. Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.
7. Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.
8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.
9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
10. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.
11. Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points,
creating a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is
required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause
electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.

4

13. Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.
• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.
• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.
• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.
• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.
• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.
14. Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and
may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.
15. Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the
AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.
16. The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with
110 V machine, then it should be 16 AWGa or bigger.
17. Use only No.26 AWG* or larger telephone line cord.
18. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
19. This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication
configuration and etc.)
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge

LASER SAFETY STATEMENT
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.

WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,
can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:

5

OZONE SAFETY
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.

MERCURY SAFETY
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)

PERCHLORATE WARNING
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California
USA.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. (U.S.A. only)

POWER SAVER
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov

RECYCLING
Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its
working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other
types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed
with other commercial wastes for disposal.

6

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to
human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through
your local, free battery return system.

RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.

FAX BRANDING
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or
on the first page of the transmission the following information:
(1) the date and time of transmission
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can
be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or
require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service

7

RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of
the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether
you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving
telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone
line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on
your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to
the telephone company.
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may
temporarily cease service, providing that they:
a) promptly notify the customer.
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in
FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.

You should also know that:
•
•

Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and
reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with
your machine.
• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power
and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency
number.
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.

REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until
you have another fuse cover.
Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have
normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.

Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral

8

• Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or
green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)
Approvals and Certifications
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/
68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer name
to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic
compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd. representative.

EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and
compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.

OPENSSL LICENSE
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without
5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

9

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply
to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with
this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric
Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

10

contents
1
4

INTRODUCTION

18

GETTING STARTED

25

LOADING ORIGINALS AND PRINT MEDIA

33
11

Features of your new laser MFP
Safety Information

18
18
18
19
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
22
22
22
23
24
24
24

Printer overview
Front view
Rear view
Control panel overview
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
Touch screen
Machine Setup button
Job Status button
Power Saver button
Interrupt button
Understanding the Status LED
Menu overview
Main screen
Machine Setup button
Job Status button
Supplied software
Printer driver features
Printer driver

25
25
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
31

Setting up the hardware
Setting up the network
Supported operating systems
Configuring network protocol via the machine
System requirements
Windows
Macintosh
Linux
Installing the software
Machine's basic settings
Altitude adjustment
Setting the authentication password
Setting the date and time
Changing the display language
Setting job timeout
Using energy saving feature
Setting the default tray and paper
Changing the default settings
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
IP setting using SetIP Program (Linux)
Understanding the keyboard

33
33
33
34
35
36
36
37
38

Loading originals
On the scanner glass
In the DADF
Selecting print media
Specification on print media
Media sizes supported in each mode
Guidelines for special print media
Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray
Loading paper

contents
COPYING

41

SCANNING

50

38
39
40

Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional high capacity feeder
In the multi-purpose tray
Setting the paper size and type

41
41
41
42
42
42
42
43
43
44
44
44
44
44
45
45
46
46
46
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
49
49

Understanding the Copy screen
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Image tab
Copying originals
Changing the settings for each copy
Changing the size of originals
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)
Selecting the type of originals
Changing the darkness
Using special copy features
Merging multiple jobs as a single copy
ID card copying
Copying ID with the manual ID copy option
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
Poster copying
Clone copying
Book copying
Booklet copying
Cover copying
Transparency copying
Erasing edges
Erasing background images
Shifting margins
Watermark copying
Overlay copying
Auto crop copying

50
50
51
52
52
52
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
55
56
56
56
56
56
57
57

Scanning basics
Understanding the Scan screen
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Image tab
Output tab
Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment
Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email
Setting up an email account
Storing email addresses
Entering email addresses by the address book
Entering email addresses by the keyboard
Using Samsung Scan Manager
Set Scan Button tab
Change Port tab
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/FTP server(s) at once
Changing the scan feature settings
Duplex

12

contents

BASIC PRINTING

60
FAXING (OPTIONAL)

61

13

57
57
58
58
58
58
58
58
59
59
59

Resolution
Original Size
Original Type
Color Mode
Darkness
Erase Background
Scan to Edge
Quality
File Format
PDF Encryption
Scan Preset

60
60

Printing a document
Canceling a print job

61
61
61
62
62
62
62
62
63
63
63
63
64
64
64
64
64
64
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
66
66
66
66
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
68

Preparing to fax
Understanding the Fax screen
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Image tab
Sending a fax
Setting the fax header
Sending a fax
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)
Automatic resending
Redialing the last number
Delaying a fax transmission
Sending a priority fax
Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission
Receiving a fax
Changing the receive modes
Receiving manually in Telephone mode
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode
Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone
Receiving in secure receiving mode
Receiving faxes in memory
Adjusting the document settings
Duplex
Resolution
Original Type
Darkness
Erase Background
Color Mode
Setting up a fax phonebook
Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web Service
Using the polling option
Storing the originals for polling
Printing (Deleting) the polling document
Polling a remote fax
Polling from a remote Mailbox
Using Mailbox
Creating Mailbox

contents

USING USB MEMORY DEVICE

72

USING DOCUMENT BOX

77

68
69
69
69
70
70
70
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
71
71

Storing originals in Mailbox
Faxing to a remote Mailbox
Printing a report after sending a fax
Sending a fax in toll save time
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
Forwarding a received fax to other destination
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server
Setting up the end Fax tone
Sending a fax from a Computer
Sending a fax from your Computer
Checking a sent fax list

72
72
72
73
73
73
73
73
73
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
76
76

About USB memory
Understanding the USB screen
Plugging in a USB memory device
Scanning to an USB memory device
Scanning
Scan to USB
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Image tab
Output tab
Changing the scan feature settings
Duplex
Resolution
Original Size
Original Type
Color Mode
Darkness
Erase Background
Scan to Edge
Quality
Scan Preset
File Format
File Policy
Printing from a USB memory device
To print a document from a USB memory device:

77
77
77
78
78
78
78
78
78

About Document Box
Understanding the Document box screen
Document Box Screen
Box Adding Screen
Edit a Box Screen
Document List Screen
Storing documents to Document box
Storing documents from document box
Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function

14

contents
USING STANDARD WORKFLOW

80

MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED SETUP

83

MAINTENANCE

94

15

80
80
80
81
81
82
82
82
82
82
82

About Standard Workflow
Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen
Workflow Screen
Workform Creating Screen
Various Operations with Workform
Scan to multi-destination
Fax forwarding
Auto redirection
Delayed start feature
Notification feature
Approval feature

83
83
83
83
84
86
86
87
88
88
91
91
91
91
92
92
93

Machine Setup
Machine Status screen
Admin Setting screen
Browsing the machine’s status
General settings
Copy Setup
Fax Setup
Network Setup
Security
Access Control
Log
Change Admin. Password
Information Hiding
Optional Service
Document Box Management
Standard Workflow Management
Printing a report

94
94
94
94
94
94
94
95
95
95
95
95
95
96
96
96
96
97
97
97
99
99
99

Printing a machine report
Monitoring the supplies life
Finding the serial number
Sending the imaging unit reorder notification
Sending the toner reorder notification
Checking Document Box
Cleaning your machine
Cleaning the outside
Cleaning the inside
Cleaning the transfer unit
Cleaning the scan unit
Maintaining the Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge storage
Handling instructions
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Estimated cartridge life
Replacing the toner cartridge
Maintaining the imaging unit
Expected cartridge life
Replacing the imaging unit
Maintenance Parts
Managing your machine from the website
To access SyncThru™ Web Service:

contents
TROUBLESHOOTING

100

ORDERING SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES

121
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

123
SPECIFICATIONS

126

100
100
101
101
102
102
103
104
106
106
106
107
107
108
111
111
111
112
114
116
116
117
117
117
118
119
120

Tips for avoiding paper jams
Clearing document jams
Misfeed of exiting paper
Roller misfeed
Clearing paper jams
In the tray 1
In the optional tray
In the optional high capacity feeder
In the multi-purpose tray
In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge
In the paper exit area
In the duplex unit area
In the stacker (finisher)
Understanding display messages
Solving other problems
Touch screen problem
Paper feeding problems
Printing problems
Printing quality problems
Copying problems
Scanning problems
Samsung Scan Manager Problem
Fax problems
Common PostScript problems
Common Windows problems
Common Linux problems
Common Macintosh problems

121 Supplies
121 Accessories
122 How to purchase

123
123
123
124
124
125

Precautions to take when installing accessories
Installing a memory DIMM
Installing a memory module
Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties
Replacing the Stapler
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit

126
126
127
127
127

General specifications
Printer specifications
Copier specifications
Scanner specifications
Facsimile specifications (optional)

16

contents
GLOSSARY

128
INDEX

132

17

introduction
These are the main components of your machine:
This chapter includes
•
•
•
•

Printer overview
Control panel overview
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
Understanding the Status LED

•
•
•

Menu overview
Supplied software
Printer driver features

z

PRINTER OVERVIEW
Front view

8

DADF document output tray

18

toner cartridge

9

scanner lid

19

imaging unit

10

Control panel

a. The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.

Rear view

1

DADF document width
guides

11

2

DADF cover

12

Multi-purpose tray

3

Output support

13

Front cover

14

Multi-purpose tray
extension

4

Tray 1

1

Extension telephone socket
(EXT)a

7

2

Telephone line socket
(LINE)a

8

3

USB port

9

Power receptacle

10

Finisher output tray
(Stacker & Stapler)a
finisher cover (Stacker &
Stapler)a

Side cover

5

Optional traya

15

Multi-purpose tray paper
width guides

6

Standa

16

Scanner lock switch

7

DADF document input tray

17

Scanner glass

4

network port

5

dummy for FDI (Foreign
Device Interfacea)

11

6

15-pin Finisher connection
(Stacker & Stapler)a

12

USB memory port
Power switch

finisher (Stacker & Stapler)a

a. The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.

Introduction_ 18

CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW

1

Machine Setup

Leads you to the machine setup and advanced
settings. (See "Machine Setup" on page 83.)

2

Job Status

Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs or
completed jobs.

3

Status

Shows the status of your machine. (See
"Understanding the Status LED" on page 21.)

4

Display screen

Displays the current machine status and prompts
during an operation. You can set menus easily
using the touch screen.

5

number keypad

Dials fax number, and enters the number value
for document copies or other options.

6

Clear

Deletes characters in the edit area.

7

Redial/Pause

In standby mode, redials the last number, or in
edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.

8

On Hook Dial

Engages the telephone line.

9

Interrupt

Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.

10

Clear All

Reverts the current settings to the default values.

11

Power Saver

Sends the machine into the power saver mode.
(See "Using energy saving feature" on page 29.)

12

Stop

Stops an operation at any time. The pop up
window appears on the screen showing the
current job that the user can stop or resume.

13

Start

Starts a job.

•
•

All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models.
When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen
may be damaged with a sharpen pen or else.

19 _Introduction

INTRODUCING THE TOUCH SCREEN AND
USEFUL BUTTONS

•

Touch screen
The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once

•
•
•

you press the home icon (

•

) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.

: This button allows you to move to Copy, Fax, Scan,
Document Box menu directly.
Machine Status: Shows the current status of the machine.
Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.
Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.
Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Job Status button
When you press this button, the screen shows the lists of currently running
jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.

•

: Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature
contents.
Copy: Enters the Copy menu.
Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)
Scan: Enters Scan to Email, Scan to PC, Scan to Server menu.
Document Box: Enters the Document Box menu. (See "Checking
Document Box" on page 94.)
USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on
your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.
Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in account.
Toner Info.: Shows amount of toner used.
LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

: To change the language that appears on the display.

•

USB: guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the
machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only
when you connect an USB memory module.
•
•

Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed
out, depending on the optional kit or program installed in your
machine.
To switch the display screen and see other available icons, press
the right arrow on the display screen.

Machine Setup button
When you press this button, you can browse current machine settings or
change machine values. (See "Machine Setup" on page 83.)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.
Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.
Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.
No.: Gives the order of jobs. The job in No. 001 is currently in
progress.
Job Name: Shows job information like name and type.
Status: Gives the current status of each job.
User:Provides user name, mainly computer name.
Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type,
recipient phone number and other information.
Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.
Delete All: Removes all the jobs from the list.
Detail: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the
Active Notice list.
Close: Closes the job status window and switches to previous view.

Power Saver button
When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power
save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.
(See "Using energy saving feature" on page 29.)
If you press this button for more than two seconds, a window appears,
requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is
turned off. This button can also be used to turn the button on.
STATUS
Off
Blue

DESCRIPTION
The machine is not in the power save mode.

On

The machine is in the low power save mode.

Blink

The machine is in the power save mode.

Introduction_ 20

Interrupt button
When you press this button, the machine goes into interrupt mode which
means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent copy job
completes, the previous printing job continues.
STATUS

DESCRIPTION

Off

The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.

Blue

On

The machine is in interrupt printing mode.

Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the machine is
shut down or reset.

UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's
condition by the light color of it's action.
STATUS
Off

Green

Blinking

DESCRIPTION
•
•

The machine is off-line.
The machine is in power save mode. When
data is received, or any button is pressed, it
switches to on-line automatically.

•

When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine
is receiving data from the computer.
When the backlight blinks rapidly, the
machine is printing data.

•

Red

On

The machine is on-line and can be used.

Blinking

•

•

On

•

•

•
•
•
•

21 _Introduction

A minor error has occurred and the machine is
waiting the error to be cleared. Check the
display message. When the problem is
cleared, the machine resumes.
The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner
cartridge. You can temporarily improve print
quality by redistributing the toner. (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 96.)
The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan.
Remove the old imaging unit and install a new
one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on
page 97.)
The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove
the old toner cartridge and install a new one.
(See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 96.)
A paper jam has occurred. (See "Clearing
paper jams" on page 102.)
The cover is opened. Close the cover.
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in
the tray.
The machine has stopped due to a major
error. Check the display message. (See
"Understanding display messages" on
page 108.)

Check the message on the display screen, and follow the instruction
on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part. See
"Troubleshooting" on page 100. If the problem persists, call for
service.

MENU OVERVIEW
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine
Setup, Job Status, or touching menus on the display screen. Refer to the following diagram.

Main screen
The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel. Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.
.

Copy
Basic tab (Page 41)
Original Size
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplex
Output
Original Type
Darkness
Paper Supply
Advanced tab (Page 41)
ID Copy
N-Up
Poster Copy
Clone Copy
Book Copy
Booklet
Covers
Transparencies
WaterMark
Overlay
Auto Crop

Copy (Continued)
Image tab (Page 42)
Erase Edge
Erase Background
Margin Shift

Fax
Basic tab (Page 61)
Address
Duplex
Resolution
Advanced tab (Page 62)
Original Size
Delay Send
Priority Send
Polling
Mailbox
Image tab (Page 62)
Original Type
Darkness
Erase Background
Color Mode

Scan
Scan to Email
Basic tab (Page 51)
Advanced tab
(Page 52)
Image tab (Page 52)
Output tab (Page 52)
Scan to PC
Scan to Server
Basic tab (Page 51)
Advanced tab
(Page 52)
Image tab (Page 52)
Output tab (Page 52)

Document Box
User Box tab (Page 94)
Add
Delete
Edit
Detail
Search
Enter
System Box tab
(Page 94)
Detail
Enter
USB
USB Format
USB Print
Scan to USB
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Image tab
Output tab

Machine Setup button
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the screen displays three menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life, billing, counters and
reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Machine Status
.

Supplies Life tab
(Page 83)
Toner Cartridge
Imaging Unit
Fuser Kit
Feed Roller Kit
Feed Roller Kit - Bypass
Tray
Document Feeder Roller
BTR Kit
DADF Friction Pad Kit

Machine Info tab
(Page 83)
Machine Details
Customer Support
Machine Serial
Number
IP Address
Hardware Options
Configuration
Software Versions
Tray Status
Tray
Status
Paper Size
Paper Type
Print/Report
System Report
Scan Report
Fax Report

Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Usage Counters
Total Impressions
Black Impressions
Black Copied
Impressions
Black Printed
Impressions
Sheets
Copied Sheets
Black Copied Sheets
Printed Sheets
Black Printed Sheets
2 Sided Sheets
Copied 2 Sided
Sheets

Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Black Copied 2-Sided
Sheets
Printed 2 Sided Sheets
Black Printed 2-Sided
Sheets
Analog Fax Sheets
Analog Fax 2-Sided
Sheets
Fax Image Received
Analog Fax Images
Sent
Analog Fax Images
Received
Images Sent
Network Scanning
Images Sent

Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Email Images Sent
Maintenance
Impressions
Black Maintenance
Impressions

Introduction_ 22

Admin Setting
.

General tab
(Page 84)
Device Info
Date & Time
Default Settings
Measurement
Timers
Language
Power Saver
Tray Management
Altitude Adjustment
Output Option
Contention Management
Sound
Supplies Management
Machine Test
Manual Image Overwrite
HDD Spooling
Stored Job File Policy
Country
Home Window
Background
Multi-Bin
Stamp

Setup tab
(Page 86)
Copy Setup
Fax Setup
Network Setup
Security
Optional Service
Document Box
Management
Standard Workflow
Management

Print/Report tab
(Page 93)
Print
Accounting Reports
Report

Usage Page Report
When the display “Are you sure you want to print it?” shows, press “Yes”.

Job Status button
This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the notice message such as an error. (See "Job Status button" on page 20.)
.

Current Job tab
Detail
Delete
Delete All

23 _Introduction

Completed Job tab
Detail

Active Notice tab
Detail

SUPPLIED SOFTWARE

PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES

After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you
must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS,
install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user,
download the software from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/
printer) and install.

Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
• Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection
• Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer
drivers:

OS
Windows

CONTENTS
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

Linux

•
•
•
•

Macintosh

•
•
•
•

Printer driver: Use this driver to take full
advantage of your printer’s features.
Postscript printer driver: Use the PostScript
driver to print documents with complex fonts and
graphics in the PS language.
Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for
scanning documents on your machine.
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error
occurs during printing.
SmarThru Officea: This is the accompanying
Windows-based software for your multifunctional
machine.
Samsung Scan Manager: This program allows you
to scan a document on your machine and save it to
a network-connected computer.
Direct Printing Utility: This program allows you
to print PDF files directly.
Samsung Network PC Fax: This program allows
you to send a fax from you computer.
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/
IP addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for
SetIP.
Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file: Use
this file to run your machine from a Linux
computer and print documents.
SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error
occurs during printing.
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/
IP addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for
SetIP.
Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file: Use
this file to run your machine from a Macintosh
computer and print documents.
Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for
scanning documents on your machine.
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error
occurs during printing.
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/
IP addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for
SetIP.

Printer driver
PCL 6

POSTSCRIPT

FEATURE
WINDOWS

WINDOWS

LINUX

MACINTOSH

Toner save

O

O

O

O

Machine quality
option

O

O

O

O

Poster printing

O

X

X

X

Multiple pages
per sheet (N-up)

O

O

O (2, 4)

O

Fit to page
printing

O

O

O

O

Scale printing

O

O

O

O

Different source
for first page

O

X

X

O

Watermark

O

X

X

X

Overlay

O

X

X

X

Duplexa

O

O

O

O

Secu Print

O

O

X

O

Scheduled Print

O

O

X

O

Spool Print

O

O

X

O

Proof Print

O

O

X

X

Stapler

O

O

O

O

a. The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.

a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful
image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open
another image editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru.
For details, please refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru
program.

Introduction_ 24

getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•

Setting up the hardware
Setting up the network
System requirements

SETTING UP THE HARDWARE
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in
the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and
complete following steps.
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow
extra space to open covers and trays.
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the
edge of your desk or table.

•
•
•

Installing the software
Machine's basic settings
Understanding the keyboard

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.
Install both the print cartridge and imaging unit.
Load paper. (See "Loading paper" on page 38.)
Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.
Turn the machine on.

•
•

•

This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.
Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by
toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad printing
quality.
If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long
time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode.
Then close the scan lid and turn the power off. And open the scan
lid and lock the scanner lock.

SETTING UP THE NETWORK
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the
machine's touch screen.
If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a
computer and you machine. Then, refer to Software section.

Supported operating systems
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine:

ITEM
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the
altitude setting to optimize your printing. See page 29 for more
information.
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline
greater than 5 mm (0.02 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be
affected.

2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.

25 _Getting Started

REQUIREMENTS

Network interface

Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX

Network operating system

•
•
•
•

Novell NetWare 5.x, 6.x
Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/
Server 2008 R2
Various Linux OS
Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6

Network protocols

•
•

TCP/IP
EtherTalk

Dynamic addressing
server

DHCP, BOOTP

If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to set up a
DHCP network protocol, go to http://developer.apple.com/networking/
bonjour/download/, select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for
your computer operating system and install the program. This program
will allow you to set network parameters automatically. Follow the
instructions in the installation window. This program does not support
Linux.

Configuring network protocol via the machine
You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps listed below.
1. Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45
Ethernet cable.
2. Make sure you have turned on the machine.
3. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
4. Press Admin Setting.
5. When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password
input area, then the question marks appears. Use the number keypad on
the control panel to enter the password. Once the password is entered,
press OK. (Factory setting:1111)
6. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.
7. Select TCP/IP Protocol.
• Apple Talk Protocol: This protocol is widely used in Macintosh
network environments.
• Ethernet Speed: You can select the communication speed for
Ethernet connections.
8. Press IP Setting.
9. Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway
address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses by number
keypad on the control panel.

You can also set up the network settings through the network
administration programs.
• SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: Web-based printer
management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™
Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and
troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate
internet access. Download this program from http://
solution.samsungprinter.com.
• SyncThru™ Web Service: Web server embedded on your
network print server, which allows you to:
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to
connect to various network environments.
- Customize machine settings.
- Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning
to email.
- Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning
to the FTP or SMB servers.
- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings
• SetIP: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface
and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP
protocol. See "IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on
page 30, "IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on
page 31, or"IP setting using SetIP Program (Linux)" on page 31.
• AnyWeb Print: This tool helps you to screen-capture, preview,
scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more
easily, than when you use the ordinary program. Click Start > All
Programs > you machine name > AnyWeb Print to link the
website where the tool is available for the download. This tool is
available only for Windows operating systems.

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following
requirements:

Windows
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
OS
CPU

FREE HDD
SPACE

RAM

Windows 2000

Pentium II 400 MHz
(Pentium III 933 MHz)

64 MB
(128 MB)

600 MB

Windows XP

Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)

128 MB
(256 MB)

1.5 GB

Windows
Server 2003

Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)

128 MB
(512 MB)

1.25 GB to
2 GB

Windows
Server 2008

Pentium IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)

512 MB
(2048 MB)

10 GB

Windows
Vista

Pentium IV 3 GHz

512 MB
(1024 MB)

15 GB

Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.
10. Press OK.

Getting Started_ 26

REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
OS
CPU
Windows 7

Pentium IV 1 GHz 32bit or 64-bit processor
or higher
•

•
•
•

1 GB
(2 GB)

ITEM

Pentium IV 1
GHz(x86) or
1.4GHz(x64)
processors(2GHz or
faster)

512 MB
(2048 MB)

RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)
Fedora Core 2~9 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux 9.1 (32bit)
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3,
11.0 (32/64bit)
Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 (32/64bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64bit)

CPU

Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)

RAM

512 MB (1024 MB)

free HDD space

1 GB (2 GB)

10 GB

Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all
Windows operating systems.
Users who have an administrator right can install the software.
Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine.

•
•

Macintosh
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
OPERATIN
G SYSTEM
Mac OS X
10.3 ~ 10.4

CPU
•
•

Mac OS X
10.5

•

•
Mac OS X
10.6

•

RAM

PowerPC G4/
G5
Intel
processors

•

867 MHz or
faster
PowerPC G4/
G5
Intel
processors

512 MB (1 GB)

•

128 MB for a
PowerPC based
MAC (512 MB)
512 MB for an
Intel based MAC
(1 GB)

Intel Processor 1 GB (2 GB)

27 _Getting Started

FREE HDD
SPACE
1 GB

1 GB

It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for
working with large scanned images.
The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at
maximum.

INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
You have to install the machine software for printing. The software includes
drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.
•
•

1 GB

REQUIREMENTS

Operating system

16 GB

Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB
memory(to enable the Aero theme).
DVD-R/W Drive

•
Windows
Server 2008
R2

FREE HDD
SPACE

RAM

Linux

The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as
a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with a USB
cable, refer to Software section.
The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating
system. The procedure and popup window which appears during
the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the
printer feature, or the interface in use. (See Software section.)

1. Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. (See
"Setting up the network" on page 25.) All applications should be closed
on your computer before beginning installation.
2. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive
and click OK.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2,
click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run, and type
X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control
window.
3. Click Next.

5. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the printer
you want to install from the list and then click Next.

•

The window above may slightly differ, if you are reinstalling the
driver.
4. Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click Next.

•

•

If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to refresh the
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine to the network.
To add the machine to the network, enter the port name and the IP
address for the machine.
To verify your machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page. (See "Printing a report" on page 93.)
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer
[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer
by clicking the Browse button.
If you are not sure of the IP address, contact your network
administrator or print network information. (See "Printing a
report" on page 93.)

6. After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a
test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in
order to receive information from Samsung. If you so desire, select the
corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.
•
•

If your machine does not work properly after the installation, try
to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.
During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer
detects the location information for your operating system and
sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a
different Windows location, you must change the paper size to
match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to
change the paper size after installation is complete.

Getting Started_ 28

MACHINE'S BASIC SETTINGS

7. Press OK.

After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values.

Setting the date and time

Altitude adjustment
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality
of print.
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the
machine.

When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print,
also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need
to change it for correct time being.
If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the correct time
and date once the power has been restored.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date & Time.
5. Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area and
use the numeric keypad on the control panel.
6. Press OK.
To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and Time
Format.

1
2
3
4

Normal
High 1
High 2
High 3

Changing the display language

1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go
to access the web site of your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Click Settings > Machine Settings > System > Setup > Altitude Adj.
4. Select the appropriate altitude value.
5. Click Apply.

To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following
steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.
6. Select the desired language.
7. Press OK.

Setting the authentication password

Setting job timeout

0

To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To
change password, follow the next steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password
input area, then the question marks appears, use the number keypad on
the control panel to enter the password. Then, press OK. (Factory
setting:1111)
4. Press the Setup tab > Authentication.
5. Press Change Admin. Password.

When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the
current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press Timers.
6. Select System Timeout.
• You can set the Held Job Timeout option to over one hour.
7. Select On.
8. Select a duration using left/right arrows.
9. Press OK.

Using energy saving feature

6. Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.

29 _Getting Started

The machine provides energy saving features.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Power Saver.

6. Select appropriate option and time.

•
•

Scan Power Save: Turns off the scanner lamp under the glass.
Low Power Save: Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under
125 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan
for the fuser unit.
• Power Save: Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after
certain time.
7. Press OK.

Setting the default tray and paper
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing
job. (See "General settings" on page 84.)
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray
Management.
6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.
7. Press OK.
If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen is
grayed out.

Changing the default settings
You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at
once.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.

5. Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.

For example, if you want to change the default setting of the brightness
& darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and adjust the
brightness & darkness.
6. Press OK.

IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report.
You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by
performing the following:
1. Open Control Panel.
2. Double click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.

Installing the program
1. Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the driver
CD runs automatically, close the window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents the name
of your CD-ROM drive.)
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.

Starting the program
1. Connect your machine and the computer using network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as
follows:
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network
Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example,
00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine’s
network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration
Report. (See "Printing out the machine’s MAC address" on
page 31.)

Getting Started_ 30

• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your machine.
• Subnet Mask: Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine.
• Default Gateway: Enter ta new Gateway for your machine.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.

Printing out the machine’s MAC address
1.
2.
3.
4.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Print/Report.
Press System Report.
Scroll down the list on the right and select Network Configuration
Report.
5. Press Print.

necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.

IP setting using SetIP Program (Linux)
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver
installation.
You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.
1. Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s
MAC address. (See "Printing out the machine’s MAC address" on
page 31.)
2. Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
3. Double click the SetIPApplet.html file.
4. Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, and then click Apply.

IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by
performing the following:
You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open System Preferences.
Click Security.
Click the Firewall menu.
Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary for your model.

Starting the program

When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).
6. The machine prints the network information. Confirm all the settings are
correct.
7. Close the SetIP program.

UNDERSTANDING THE KEYBOARD
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using the
keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged like a
normal keyboard for better usability for the user.
Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard
pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default showing the
lowercase letters.

1. Connect your machine and the computer using network cable.
2. Insert the driver CD-ROM, and open the disk window. Open the
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
3. Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows the
printer’s name and IP address information.
4. Highlight the printer information row and select the Setup icon, which is
the second icon from the left in the application menu bar. A TCP/IP
Configuration window will open.
If the printer was not shown in the information row, select the Manual
Setting icon (third from left) to open the TCP/IP Configuration window.
5. Enter the printer’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information
assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network
Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example,
00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine’s
network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration
Report. (See "Printing out the machine’s MAC address" on
page 31.)
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your machine.
• Subnet Mask: Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine.
• Default Gateway: Enter ta new Gateway for your machine.
6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If

31 _Getting Started

1

Left/Right

Moves the cursor between characters in the input
area.

2

Backspace

Deletes the character on the left side of the
cursor.

3

Delete

Deletes the character on the right side of the
cursor.

4

Clear

Deletes all characters in the input area.

5

Input area

Enters letters within this line.

6

Shift

Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase
keys or vice versa.

7

Symbols

Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the
symbol keyboard.

8

Space

Enters a blank between characters.

9

OK

Saves and closes input result.

10

Cancel

Cancels and closes input result.

If you enter the email address, then the keyboard for email pops up.
After you enter the address, press OK to activate entered address.
Press the arrow key on the side for rotating between From, To, Cc,
Bcc, Subject, Message in order.

Getting Started_ 32

loading originals and print media
This chapter introduces you to how to load originals and print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•

Loading originals
Selecting print media

LOADING ORIGINALS
You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,
scanning, and sending a fax.

On the scanner glass
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in the
DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images,
use the scanner glass.
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.

2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.

33 _Loading originals and print media

•
•

Loading paper
Setting the paper size and type

3. Close the scanner lid.
•
•
•

Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality
and toner consumption.
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.
Always keep it clean. (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 95.)
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner
lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid.
If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with
the lid open.

In the DADF
Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of paper (75 g/m2, 20 lb) for
one job.
When you use the DADF:
• Do not load paper smaller than 174 x 128 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or
larger than 218 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
- coated paper
- onion skin or thin paper
- wrinkled or creased paper
- curled or rolled paper
- torn paper
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely
dry before loading.
• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having
other unusual characteristics.
To load an original into the DADF:
1. Load the original face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom of
the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input
tray.

2. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.

SELECTING PRINT MEDIA
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines
for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the guidelines
outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:
• Poor print quality
• Increased paper jams
• Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are
described later in this section.
• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project.
• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce
sharper, more vibrant images.
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how
crisp the printing looks on the paper.
•

Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always
keep it clean.
•

Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,
or other variables over which Samsung has no control.
Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.

Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.

Loading originals and print media_ 34

Specification on print media
TYPE
Plain paper

Envelope

Transparency

SIZE

CAPACITYB

WEIGHTA

DIMENSIONS

Letter

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)

•

Legal

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

•

Folio

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)

A4

210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)

Oficio

216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)

ISO B5

176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)

Executive

184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)

A5

148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)

Statement

140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)

A6

105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)

Envelope B5

176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 inches)

Envelope Monarch

98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)

Envelope No. 10

105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)

Envelope DL

110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)

Envelope C5

162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)

Envelope C6

114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)

Letter, A4, Oficio

Refer to the Plain paper section

•

60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb •
bond) for the tray
60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb •
bond) for the multi-purpose
tray
•
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb
bond) for the high capacity
feeder

75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb
bond)

•
•

138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb)

•
•

Labels

Card stock

Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement, Oficio, A6

Refer to the Plain paper section

Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement, Oficio, A6,
Post Card 4x6

Refer to the Plain paper section

120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb
bond)

•
90 to 220 g/m2 (24 to 58 lb
bond)

•
•

Minimum size (custom)

98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches)

Maximum size (custom)

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond)

a. If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.
b. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
c. High capacity feeder is not supported A6.

35 _Loading originals and print media

•

500 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) paper for the tray
100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) in the multi-purpose tray
2,100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) in the high capacity
feederc

50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper for the tray
10 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in
the multi-purpose tray

100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper for the tray
20 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in
the multi-purpose tray
100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper for the tray
10 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in
the multi-purpose tray
50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper for the tray
10 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in
the multi-purpose tray

Media sizes supported in each mode
MODE

SIZE

Guidelines for special print media
SOURCE

Copy mode

Letter, A4, Legal,
Oficio, Folio,
Executive, JIS B5, A5,
A6

•
•
•
•

tray 1
optional tray 2
multi-purpose tray
high capacity feeder

Single side printing

All sizes supported by
the machine

•
•
•
•

tray 1
optional tray
multi-purpose tray
high capacity feeder

Duplex printinga

Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement

•
•
•
•

tray 1
optional tray
multi-purpose tray
high capacity feeder

Letter, A4, Legal

•
•
•

tray 1
optional tray
high capacity feeder

Fax modeb

a. 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 ~ 24 lb) only
b. Only the optional fax kit is installed.

MEDIA TYPE
Envelopes

GUIDELINES
•

•
•
•
•
•

•

•
•

Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the
quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes,
consider the following factors:
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should
not exceed 90 g/m2 or jamming may occur.
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should
lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not
contain air.
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,
nicked, or otherwise damaged.
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are
compatible with the heat and pressure of the
machine during operation.
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and
well creased folds.
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows,
coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic
materials.
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.

1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with
more than one flap that folds over to seal must use
adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s
specification to view the fusing temperature, see
page see "General specifications" on page 126. The
extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling,
creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
For the best print quality, position margins no closer
than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s
seams meet.

Loading originals and print media_ 36

MEDIA TYPE
Transparencies

GUIDELINES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Labels

•

•

•
•

Card stock or
custom-sized
materials

•
•

To avoid damaging the machine, use only
transparencies designed for use in laser printers.
Transparencies used in the machine must be able
to withstand 180 °C, the machine’s fusing
temperature.
Place them on a flat surface after removing them
from the machine.
Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods
of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them,
resulting in spotty printing.
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle
them carefully.
To avoid fading, do not expose printed
transparencies to prolonged sunlight.
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled,
or have any torn edges.
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels
designed for use in laser machines.
- When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature. Check
your machine’s specification to view the fusing
temperature, see page 126.
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed
backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets
that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no
more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive
material between labels. Exposed areas can cause
labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause
damage to machine components.
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine
more than once. The adhesive backing is designed
for only a single pass through the machine.
Do not use labels that are separating from the
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise
damaged.
Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm wide or
356 mm long.
In the software application, set margins at least
6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.

37 _Loading originals and print media

MEDIA TYPE
Preprinted
paper

GUIDELINES
•

•
•
•

Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink
that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous
emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s
specification to view the fusing temperature, see
page 126.
Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and should
not adversely affect printer rollers.
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during
storage.
Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off
preprinted paper, reducing print quality.

CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE
PAPER TRAY
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.

1 paper length guide
2 paper width guide
If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to Quick
Install Sheet to adjust paper size.
1. Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset
to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load another size,
hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding
position.

2. After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width
guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly
touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the
edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.

1. To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the
side you want to print facing down.

1 Full
2 Empty
Place the side to be printed facing up.

When you use legal-sized paper, you need to extend the length of the
tray.
3. Load the paper into the tray.
4. Place the tray into the machine.
5. Set the paper size from your computer.
•
•

ENVELOPE

PREPRINTED
PAPER

TRANSPARENCY

PUNCHED PAPER

CARD STOCK

LETTERHEAD
PAPER

Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the
materials to warp.
If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper
jams.

LABEL

LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional
high capacity feeder
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1.
The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 500 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) plain
paper.
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to
load an additional 500 sheets of paper. (See "Supplies" on page 121.)
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,
requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreement.

2. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray 1. See
"Setting the paper size and type" on page 40 for copying and faxing or
Software section for PC-printing.
•
•

If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a
time in the multi-purpose tray.
You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be
facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience
problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print
quality is not guaranteed.

Loading originals and print media_ 38

In the multi-purpose tray

3. Load the paper.

The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page
printing on letterhead or colored paper.

Tips on using the multi-purpose tray
•
•

Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print
media.
• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and
print quality problems. (See "Selecting print media" on page 34.)
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading
them into the multi-purpose tray.
To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:
1. Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray
extension, as shown.

Place the side to be printed facing down.

ENVELOPE

PREPRINTED
PAPER

TRANSPARENCY

PUNCHED PAPER

CARD STOCK

LETTERHEAD
PAPER

2. If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to
separate the pages before loading.
LABEL

For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the
print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.

39 _Loading originals and print media

4. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them
to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be
bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.

Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following
loading guidelines:
• Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the
top left side.
• Transparencies: Print side up and the top with the adhesive
strip entering the machine first.
• Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the machine
first.
• Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the
machine.
• Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the
machine first.
• Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with
an uncurled edge toward the machine.
5. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-purpose
tray. See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 40 for copying
and faxing or the Software section for PC-printing.
The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on
the control panel.
6. After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the
multi-purpose tray.

SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and
type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.
For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the
application program you use on your PC.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray Management.
6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.
7. Press OK.

Loading originals and print media_ 40

copying
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine.
This chapter includes
•
•

Understanding the Copy screen
Copying originals

•
•

UNDERSTANDING THE COPY SCREEN

Changing the settings for each copy
Using special copy features

Advanced tab

When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Copy screen appears which
has several tabs and lost of copying options. All the options are grouped by
features so that you can configure your selections easily.
If the screen displays an other menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

Basic tab

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (See "Changing the
size of originals" on page 42.)
Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.
(See "Reducing or enlarging copies" on page 43.)
Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper.
(See "Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)" on page 43.)
Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you install
the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option appears.
(See "Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)" on
page 44.)
Original Type: Improves the copy quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job. (See "Selecting the type of originals" on
page 44.)
Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark
images. (See "Changing the darkness" on page 44.)
Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.
Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)

41 _Copying

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Job Build: Allows you to copy several pages or different types of
originals into a single copy. (See "Merging multiple jobs as a single
copy" on page 44.).
ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This feature
is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business card.
(See "ID card copying" on page 45.)
N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of
paper. (See "Copying ID with the manual ID copy option" on
page 45.)
Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages. (See
"Poster copying" on page 46.)
Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original
document on a single page. (See "Clone copying" on page 46.)
Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (See "Book
copying" on page 47.)
Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided or
2-sided originals. (See "Booklet copying" on page 47.)
Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock
taken from a different tray. (See "Cover copying" on page 47.)
Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between
transparencies within a set. (See "Transparency copying" on
page 47.)
WaterMark: Prints an image with the added watermark. (See
"Watermark copying" on page 48.)
Overlay: Prints an image with the image previously stored in your
machine. (See "Overlay copying" on page 49.)
Auto Crop: Prints only the image of an original after cropping the
blank parts like the margin. (See "Auto crop copying" on page 49.)

Image tab

4. Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.

5. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.

•
•
•

Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and
fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (See "Erasing
edges" on page 48.)
Erase Background: Prints an image with no background. (See
"Erasing background images" on page 48.)
Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document. (See
"Shifting margins" on page 48.)

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy more than
two copies, the message Another Page? appears after the first page
copied. At this time, if you select No, the machine starts copying the
rest of your originals and sorts the copied papers in order. Because
the default value of theOutput option is Collated.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel. Or
you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the
control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete.

COPYING ORIGINALS

CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY

This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.
1. Press Copy from the Main screen.
2. Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass
with a single original document face down.

On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features before
starting to copy.
The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the
setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the current
copy job, the machine automatically restores the default settings after
certain time. Or the machine resume to default setting when you press
the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other
menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen.
The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting. (See
"General settings" on page 84.)

Changing the size of originals
Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the
original size.
Press more to see the detail values.

3. Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/
Enlarge, Duplex and more. (See "Changing the size of originals" on
page 42., see "Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)" on page 43.)

•
•

•

Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the
cardinal point arrows to set the size.
Auto: Automatically detects the size of originals, but this option
supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5 sized. If the
originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the largest original
size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.
Mixed Size (Letter & Legal): Allows for the use of both of Letter and
Legal sized papers together, and the machine uses the proper-sized
paper from several trays. For example, if the originals are total 3

Copying_ 42

•

pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd page is the legal-sized
paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized paper, then the machine
prints the output first letter, legal, and letter in order from several
trays.
Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used
values.

•

1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and
prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back
side of the print out is rotated 180°.

•

2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of
one on a separate sheet.

•

2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both
sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out
from the originals.

•

2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and
prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back
side of the printout is rotated 180°.

•

Reverse 1 ->2 Sided: Scans originals and prints them on both sides
of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the
originals. The machine prints the second original first, which means
the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For
instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even
numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a
paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on
the back side of a paper.

•

Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans originals and prints
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print
out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original
first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side
of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every
even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of
a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed
on the back side of a paper. The information on the back side of the
print out is rotated 180°.

Reducing or enlarging copies
Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to reduce
or enlarge an image on the paper.
Press more to see the values.

•
•

Original(100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.
Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the
output paper.
• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used
values.
The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is
placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is possible. And in the
scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is possible.

Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)
Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex
value.
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides
of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page
copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and
press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your
original.
Press more to see the detail values.
• 1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of
the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from
originals.

•

1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both
sides of the paper.

43 _Copying

•

Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans the both sides of originals and prints
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print
out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of
originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on
the back side of a paper.

Selecting the type of originals
Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.

•
•
•

Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)
Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated
or Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.

Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
Photo: Use when originals are photographs.

Changing the darkness
This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the
level of light/dark in the printouts.

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides
of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page
copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and
press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your
original.
Press more to see the values.
• Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.

USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES
On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can select
specific copy features.

Merging multiple jobs as a single copy
•

Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.

This feature allows you to merge multiple copy jobs into a single copy. For
example, if you need to use the DADF and the scanner glass for a
copy job, you can use this feature. In the picture below, each number
means each segment order.

䓅
•

䓄

Staple, Portrait: Adds a single staple to all of your portrait-oriented
output.

䓆

䓇

① Segment 1 from the DADF.
② Segment 2 from the scanner
glass.
③ Segment 3 from the DADF.
④ Segment 4 from the scanner
glass.
⑤ Segment 5 from the DADF.

䓈
•

Staple, Landscape: Adds a single staple to all of your landscapeoriented output.

When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment
list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Press Copy from the Main screen.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
Press On to enable job build function.

The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker & stapler. (See
"Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)" on page 121.)

Copying_ 44

•
•
•

5.
6.
7.
8.

Off: Disables Job Build feature.
On: Enables Job Build feature.
Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen. is displayed Then the user can select to
keep copying or stop.
• Print: Prints the sample page(s) of a segment to confirm the
contents.
• Delete: Deletes a segment.
• Delete All: Deletes all segments.
• Print All: Prints all segments.
• Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
• Cancel: Removes all segments in the list, and cancels the job.
Press Add Segment.
Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass
with a single original document face down.
Press Start on the control panel.
Then the machine starts scanning.
Repeat step 5 to step 7.
As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you can add
segments without any restriction.

9. After adding segments, press Print All.

ID card copying
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business
card.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.

6. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.

7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
•
•

If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may
not be printed.
If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1
Sided, the Output option to Collated.

Copying ID with the manual ID copy option
If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying position
of the page, follow the next steps.
Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license
cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.
1

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2

Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.

3

Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup > Manual ID Copy Setup.

4

Press the number from the template list table.

5

Press Edit Template.

6

Selec the appropriate option values and press OK.
• Template Name: Enter the template name.
• Scan Position: Select the position for scanning. You should select the
largest scanning position out of the originals.

The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.

LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y090mm

1. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Press Copy from the Main screen.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.
Press Start on the control panel.
Then the machine starts scanning the front side.
• Number of Images: Select how many images are on a page. (select
number 4.)

45 _Copying

• Image Position: Select the position of a page which images are on. If
you choose to copy four images, you have to select four positions
here.
- First Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm
- Second Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm
- Third Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm
- Forth Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm

Poster copying

7

Press OK, the template you have saved will be shown in the template
list table.

8

Press

9

Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy > Manual ID Copy >.

1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading
originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.

and select Copy.

10 Press the template you have saved from the template list.
11 Press the Start button on the control panel. now follow the instruction
on display to finish the ID copy for four images

2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages
onto one sheet of paper.
2 or 4-up copying is available only when you load originals into the DADF.
2

3

4

This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are
selected as below;
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)
- Paper Supply to Tray.
5. Press On to activate this feature.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and
printed one by one in the following order:

1

2

1

Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages
together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is available
only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each portion is
scanned and printed on by one in the following order.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.
5. Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.
• Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.
• 2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.
• 4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.
6. Press Start on the control panel.

Clone copying
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number
of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper
size.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.

You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for the NUp feature.

1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading
originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

Copying_ 46

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are
selected as below;
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)
- Paper Supply to Tray.
5. Press On to activate this feature.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Book copying
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid
until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If
the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm(1.18 inches), start copying with
the scanner lid open.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.
5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each
option.
• 1 Sided Original: Copies on one side of the paper.
• 2 Sided Original: Copies on both sides of the paper.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio, JIS
B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.

Cover copying
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken
from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the
main body of the job.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Covers.
Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you cannot use
this feature.

1. Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading
originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab > Erase
Edge > Book Center and Edges Erase.
3. Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.
4. Select the binding option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Left Page: Prints left page of the book.
• Right Page: Prints right page of the book.
• Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Booklet copying
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper,
which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in
the correct sequence.
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each
image to fit on the selected paper.

47 _Copying

5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each
option.
• Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front, back,
or both.
• Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or
blank paper.
• Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is
loaded.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Transparency copying
When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to copy
the information.
Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types and
Paper Size to Transparency.(See "Setting the paper size and type" on
page 40.)
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.
3. Set the paper type to Transparency.
4. Press Copy from the Main screen.
5. Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.
6. Select Transparencies option.
• No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between
transparencies.
• Blank Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.
• Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as
printed on the transparency.
7. Select media sources, in case you selected either Blank Sheet or
Printed Sheet.

8. Press OK.
9. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Shifting margins
You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.

Erasing edges
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.

1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the
originals face up in the DADF. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.
4. Select the appropriate option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.
• Small Original Erase: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the
copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this
feature.
• Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of
the copies.
• Book Center and Edges Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or
book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This feature
only applies when you do copying a book. (See "Book copying" on
page 47.)
If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use Book
Center and Edges Erase.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Press the Image tab > Margin Shift
4. Select Margin Shift option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Auto Center: Adjusts centers of the paper copy automatically. The
original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This
option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.
• Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and
bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the
scanner glass or in DADF.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Watermark copying
You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it
when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or
Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the
copy.

5. Press OK.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Erasing background images
This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the
background, as in newspapers or catalogs.
1. Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass.
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Press the Image tab > Erase Background.
4. Select the appropriate option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.
• Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background
is.
• Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > WaterMark.
5. Select WaterMark option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Top Secret: Prints the original with Top Secret text.
• Confidential: Prints the original with Confidential text.
• Urgent: Prints the original with Urgent text.
• Draft: Prints the original with Draft text.
• Custom: The machine prints the original with the customized
text.
6. Select 1st Page only, Size, Position, Darkness of options.
7. Press OK.
8. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Copying_ 48

Overlay copying
If you scan and store the data such as format, you can copy the
original with the previously stored data.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Overlay.
5. Press List.
6. Select a file name.
7. Select a overlay option.
• New: Makes the new overlay. When the file name pops up, enter the
file name.
• Detail: Shows information of the selected overlay.
• Edit: Modifies the name of the selected overlay.
• Delete: Deletes the selected overlay.
• Apply: Prints the originals with the selected overlay.
• Print: Prints the selected overlay.
• Cancel: Cancels overlay options you have selected.
8. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
If you have selected option New in step 7, the machine starts storing the
new overlay by pressing the Start button.

Auto crop copying
The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank
parts like the margin.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Auto Crop.
5. Press On to activate this feature.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

49 _Copying

scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer. Then you can fax
or email the files, upload them to your website, or use them to create projects that you can print.
This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.
This chapter includes
•
•
•
•

Scanning basics
Understanding the Scan screen
Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
Using Samsung Scan Manager
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,
depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not
be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced
resolution.

•
•
•

Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)
Changing the scan feature settings

UNDERSTANDING THE SCAN SCREEN
To use the scanning feature, press Scan on the Main screen. If the screen
displays an other menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

SCANNING BASICS
Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital
files.
There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to directly
connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using the network
scan feature which scans and sends the document to a specific destination
via the network.
• Samsung Scan Manager: You just walk to the machine with the
originals and scan them from the control panel. Then, the scanned data
will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When
you install all the softwares in the supplied CD, the Samsung Scan
Manager is also automatically installed on your computer. This feature
can be used via the local connection or the network connection. (See
"Using Samsung Scan Manager" on page 55.)
• TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications. Scanning an
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. See Software section. This feature can be used via
the local connection or the network connection. See Software section.
• Samsung SmarThru Office: This feature is the accompanying
software for your machine. You can use this program to scan images or
documents, and this feature can be used via the local connection or the
network connection. See Software section.
• WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature
your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB
cable. See Software section.
• Email: You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email.
(See "Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)" on
page 52.)
• FTP: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. (See
"Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)" on
page 56.)
• SMB: You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB
server. (See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
Server)" on page 56.)

If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the network
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web
Service.(See "Security" on page 88.)
Press Scan to Email, Scan to PC or Scan to Server.

•
•
•

Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the
destination by email. (See "Scanning originals and sending through
email (Scan to Email)" on page 52.)
Scan to PC: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination
with the Samsung Scan Manager program. (See "Using Samsung
Scan Manager" on page 55.)
Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the
destination with SMB and FTP. (See "Scanning originals and
sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)" on page 56.)

Scanning_ 50

Basic tab
This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to Server,
and Scan to PC's basic screen.

Scan to Email

•

•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

•

From: Sender's email address.
To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an additional
recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their name be
displayed.
Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.
Remove All: Erases everything in the input area.
Address: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored
addresses. You can store frequently used email addresses from your
computer using the SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Storing email
addresses" on page 54.)
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)
Back: Returns to the previous screen. If the network authentication
is enabled, the log off confirmation message popes up and closes
Scan to Email.

Scan to PC

Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1-Sided), both sides of the paper (2-Sided), or both sides of
paper but the back side is rotated 180 degrees (2-Sided, Rotate Side
2).
• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)
•

Scan to Server

•
•
•

If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name
and password to enter the Scan to PC screen.
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

No.: Lists the number in order for application programs.
Application: Shows the available application programs from your
computer.
Select: Moves to the application program you have selected.

51 _Scanning

Back: Returns to the previous screen. If network authentication is
enabled, the log off confirmation message pops-up and closes Scan
to PC.

SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.
FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.
No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru™ Web Service.
(See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
Server)" on page 56.)
Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru™ Web Service.
(See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
Server)" on page 56.)
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Advanced tab

•

•
•

Job Build: Allows you to scan several originals, and then send them
in a single email or send them to a server(s) at once. (See "Scanning
and sending multiple documents in a single email" on page 53. or
See "Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/FTP
server(s) at once" on page 56.)
Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See
"Original Size" on page 57.)
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Image tab

Output tab

•
•
•
•

Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See
"Quality" on page 58.)
File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
Format" on page 59.)
Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each
specific purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 59.)
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING
THROUGH EMAIL (SCAN TO EMAIL)
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several
destinations from the machine by email.

Sending a scanned image to several destinations as
an email attachment
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass for one sheet of paper.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See
"Original Type" on page 58.)
Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.
(See "Color Mode" on page 58.)
Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 58.)
Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See
"Erase Background" on page 58.)
Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to
Edge" on page 58.)
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

2. Press Scan from the Main screen.
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and
Password. This message shows only when the network
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web
Service. (See "Security" on page 88.)
3. Press Scan to Email.
4. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Advanced tab" on page 52.)
5. Press the Basic tab to enter the email address.

Scanning_ 52

•

•

•
•

From: Sender's address. Touch From and then the keyboard pops
up on the screen. Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email
addresses. Or you can use Local and Global to enter the addresses
easily. (See "Global" on page 54.)
To/Cc/Bcc: Recipient's email address manually with the pop up
keyboard, or by pressing Local or Global. Local or Global
addresses are pre-loaded address lists from your computer or the
LDAP server which is configured at Web UI. (See "Global" on
page 54.)
Subject: Title of email.
Message: Enters the text which will be as the contents of the email.
The maximum size is 1KB.
To delete previously entered contents, press Remove All.

6. Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution.
• Duplex: Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side
only, or on both sides.
• Resolution: Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left/right
arrows.
7. Press the Start button to scan and send the file.
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot perform a copy

job or send a fax.

Scanning and sending multiple documents in a
single email
You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file. And, therefore, you
can send the document with a single email.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment
list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users.
1. Press Scan from the Main screen.
2. Press Scan to Email.
3. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Advanced tab" on page 52.)
4. Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
5. Press On to enable the job build function.

•
•
•

6.
7.
8.
9.

Off: Disables Job Build feature.
On: Enables Job Build feature.
Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen is displayed. Then the user can select to
keep sending email or stop.
• Delete: Deletes a segment.
• Delete All: Deletes all segments.
• Send All: Prints all segments.
• Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
• Cancel: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
Press Add Segment.
Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner
glass for one sheet of paper.
Press Start to start the scanning job.
Repeat step 6 to step 8.
As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you can add
segments without any restriction.

10. After adding segments, press Send All.

Setting up an email account
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. ( See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
5. Click Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).
6. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
7. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 25.
8. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
authentication.
9. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
10. Click Apply.
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3beforeSMTP,
check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP
Authentication.
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port
number is 25.
If SMTP server requires SSL/TLS connection, enable Secure E-mail
Connection with SSL/TLS

53 _Scanning

Storing email addresses

Entering email addresses by the address book

There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's memory
and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on where they are
stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine's memory,
and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain (LDAP) server.
Through the SyncThru™ Web Service, you can easily enter and store
email addresses from your computer.

Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book,
you can simply enter email addresses.
1. Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email.

Individual
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
Click Address Book.
Click Add.
When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Speed No. from 1
to 500, enter User Name and E-mail Address.
7. Click Apply.
8. Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine
by pressing Local > the Individual tab.

The search window shows.
2. Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for. Or
press Search to specify the search criteria.

Group
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Access to the SyncThru™ Web Service from your computer.
Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.
Click Address Book > E-mail Groups.
Click Add Group.
Enter Group Name and Speed No..
Add Individual addresses to the e-mail group.
Click Apply.
Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your
machine by pressing Group.

Global
Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are
processed by the LDAP server.
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Log in to the web site as an administrator. (See "Managing your
machine from the website" on page 99.)
5. Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
6. Enter LDAP server and Port.
7. Enter optional information.
8. Click Apply.

When the search is completed, the screen displays the search results.
3. Press From and enter your email address and press OK.
4. Select the address you want in the right-hand pane, and the press To,
Cc or Bcc in the left-hand pane.
5. Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.
6. Press OK.

The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data.
The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the
operating systems.

Scanning_ 54

Entering email addresses by the keyboard

Set Scan Button tab

When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or message input field,
the keyboard shows on the display screen.
The following explanation is the example that you are entering
"abcdefg@abc.com".
1. Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.
Press @.
Press a, b, c.
Press . and press c, o, m.
to enter contents in other fields, press
keyboard.

Scan Destination
•
on the
•

6. Press OK after finishing all the contents.

•

USING SAMSUNG SCAN MANAGER

•

If you have installed the printer driver, Samsung Scan Manager program
has installed too. Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out about
this program information and the installed scan driver's condition. Through
this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders
where scanned documents are saved in your computer.
The Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the
Window and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, see
Software section.

•

The scan data can be encrypted to protect the contents from
unauthorized access. You can enable the secured scan feature from
the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web
Service as an administrator. (See "Managing your machine from the
website" on page 99.) And click Setting > Machine Settings > Scan
> Scan Security > PC Scan Security.
1. From the Start menu, click Control Panel > Samsung Scan Manager.
You can open Samsung Scan Manager by right clicking the
Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan
Manager.
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager
window.
3. Press Properties.
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination
and scan settings, add or delete application program, and format files.
You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab.
(Local or Network)
5. When setting is done, press OK.

55 _Scanning

Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently
linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program
you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel
Destination List.
Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to open
scanned image.
Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to
Available Destination List.
Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the
user in the Available Destination List.
File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be
saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF, and TIFF.

Scan Property
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.
Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default
saving folder.
Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.
Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.
Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.
ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does not
support this option, it will be grayed out.
Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied
scan options. You can modify the options before scanning.
Default: Allows you to go back to default options.

Change Port tab

14. Configure Scan folder creating policy, Filing Policy and File Name.
15. Click Apply.

Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
1. Press Scan from the Main screen.
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and Password.
This message shows only when the network administrator has set the
authentication in SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Managing your
machine from the website" on page 99.)
2. Press Scan to Server.
3. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single
original document face down on the scanner glass.
4. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
5. Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab.
6. Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in the
SyncThru™ Web Service.

Local Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port.

Network Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via network port.
• Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your
machine.
• IP address: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your
machine.
7. Select the destination SMB server.

SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA SMB/
FTP (SCAN TO SERVER)
You can scan an image and send it to a server via the SMB or FTP.

Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the
scanned file.
The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru™ Web
Service, and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB. Apply the
same steps for setting up the FTP server.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
Click Address Book.
Click Add.
Enter a name and speed number.
Check Add SMB.
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port number
is 139.
10. If you want to allow the unauthorized person’s access to SMB server,
check Anonymous. By default, this is unchecked.
11. Enter the login name and password.
12. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.
13. Enter the path of shared folder in the SMB server for storing the scanned
images.

You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP
servers.
8. Press Start on the control panel.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the
specified server.

Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/
FTP server(s) at once
You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file. And, therefore, you
can send the document with a single access to the server.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment
list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users.
1. Press Scan from the Main screen.
2. Press Scan to Server.
3. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Advanced tab" on page 52.)
4. Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.

Scanning_ 56

5. Press On to enable job build function.

Resolution
You can adjust document resolution.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >
Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you
select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.

100, 200, 300 dpi resolution is available only when Color Mode is set to
Color or Gray. The following table shows detailed information feature,
resolution and file format options.
•
•
•

6.
7.
8.
9.

Off: Disables Job Build feature.
On: Enables Job Build feature.
Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen is displayed. Then the user can select to
keep sending email or stop.
• Delete: Deletes a segment.
• Delete All: Deletes all segments.
• Send All: Prints all segments.
• Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
• Cancel: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
Press Add Segment.
Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner
glass for one sheet of paper.
Press Start to start the scanning job.
Repeat step 6 to step 8.
As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can add
segments without any restriction.

10. After adding segments, press Send All.

CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after
that period, the options will be reset to default values.

Duplex
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned
are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of
the paper or both sides of the paper.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >
Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.

•
•
•

1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the
originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the
original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.

57 _Scanning

FEATURE

RESOLUTION (DPI)

FILE FORMAT

Scan to Email

100, 200, 300, 400,
600

PDF, Single-Page TIFF,
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG

Scan to PC

100, 200, 300, 400,
600

PDF, TIFF, JPEG

Scan to Server

100, 200, 300, 400,
600

PDF, Single-Page TIFF,
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG

Original Size
You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the predefined size, or putting in the margin value or Auto. If you set this option to
Auto, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Advanced tab >
Original Size. Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the
appropriate option and press OK.

Original Type

Darkness

You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a
document being scanned.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >
Original Type. Select the appropriate option and press OK.

You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output
darker.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >
Darkness. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press
OK.

Erase Background
•
•
•

Text: For originals that have text or line art.
Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs
together.
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Color Mode
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Color
Mode. Select the appropriate option and press OK.

You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning
colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Erase
Background. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.
• Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background
is.
• Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

Scan to Edge
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially
when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you
scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not
need to exclude the edges from the originals.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Scan
to Edge. Select On and press OK.
•
•

Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.

•

Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.

Quality
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality
you select a larger file size you get.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >
Quality.

When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected
for Color Mode.

Scanning_ 58

File Format
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > File
Format.

•

PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.
You can add a Digital Signature to the PDF with the certification. To
add the Digital Signature, you have to create the certification from
the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web
Service as an administrator. (See "Managing your machine from the
website" on page 99.) And click Setting > Machine Settings > Scan
> Scan Security > Digital Signature in PDF.The Digital Signature
can be used in the Scan to Server feature.
You also can create a PDF Encryption that is encrypted to protect
the contents from unauthorized access. You can set the encryption
level, password, and access permission such as reading, printing, or
modifying, etc. The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to
Server feature. (See "PDF Encryption" on page 59.)
Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
XPS: Scans original in XPS format.

•
•
•
•
•
•

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been
selected for Color Mode.
The file format XPS cannot be showed in the Scan to PC mode.

4. Select an encryption level.
• Low (RC4, 40 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 3.0 or later version.
• High (RC4, 128 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 5.0 or later
version.
• High (AES, 128 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 7.0 or later
version.
5. Enter the Owner Password to get a whole right about the PDF.
6. Enter the User Password to get an Access Permission set by the
Access Permission menu below.
7. Set the Access Permission in printing or modifying. This configuration
will affect the users accessed with the User Password.
8. Check Extract text and graphics to give users permission to extract
text or graphics.
9. Press OK.

Scan Preset
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > Scan
Preset.

•
•
•
•

PDF Encryption

•

To encrypt your PDF files, you need to set up parameters for the encryption
level, password, and access permission, etc.

•

The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server feature.
1. Press Scan > Scan to Server > the Output tab > File Format > PDF.
2. Press PDF Encryption.
3. Press On.

59 _Scanning

Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality
documents.
High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with the
largest file size.
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file
size of the output.
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect
the highest quality images.
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file
size of output is small.
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.

basic printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
•

Printing a document

•

Canceling a print job

PRINTING A DOCUMENT
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary
depending on the application you use.
For details about printing, see Software section.

CANCELING A PRINT JOB
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer
group in Windows, delete the job as follows:
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound
> Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3. For Windows 2000, XP, 2003, 2008 and Vista, double-click your
machine.
4. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer
icon > context menus > See what’ s printing.
5. From the Document menu, select Cancel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer
icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.

Basic printing_ 60

faxing (optional)
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Preparing to fax
Understanding the Fax screen
Sending a fax
Receiving a fax
Adjusting the document settings
Setting up a fax phonebook
Using the polling option
•
•

•
•

You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For
more information ask the internet service provider.
You may experience restrictions on color fax transmmission, slower
fax transmmission, poor fax quality and communication failures when
faxing over VoIP network. Contact you local network administrator or
Internet Service Provider for more details.
To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on the
control panel and Admin Setting > Setup > Fax Setup. (See "Fax
Setup" on page 86.)
We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting
telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL,
ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the
Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals
and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL
Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet
Service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Using Mailbox
Printing a report after sending a fax
Sending a fax in toll save time
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
Forwarding a received fax to other destination
Setting up the end Fax tone
Sending a fax from a Computer

UNDERSTANDING THE FAX SCREEN
To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen displays
an other menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on
the Main screen.

Basic tab

1 Line port
2 Micro filter
3 DSL modem/Telephone line

PREPARING TO FAX
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord
to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection.
The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to
another.
If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option lists
(See "Fax option kit" on page 121.) and contact the purchasing point
to order. When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the
steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit.
After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature. (See
"Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit" on page 125.)

61 _Faxing (Optional)

•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using the
number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the phone
book, press Individual or Group. (See "Setting up a fax
phonebook" on page 66.)
Add No.: Lets you add more destinations.
: Deletes the last digit entered.
: Removes all digits of the selected entry.
Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.
Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.
Address: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from
your machine or from SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Setting up a
fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 67.)

•

Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the
original, both sides of the original.
• Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.
• Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)

Advanced tab

•
•

Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or
color. (See "Color Mode" on page 66.)
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.

SENDING A FAX
This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of
transmission.
When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or the
scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.) If the originals
are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will
read the originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in
scanning.

Setting the fax header

•
•
•
•
•

•

•

Job Build: Allows you to send several fax jobs in a single fax
transmission. (See "Sending multiple faxes in a single
transmission" on page 64.).
Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK to
update current setting.
Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without
your intervention. (See "Delaying a fax transmission" on page 63.)
Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.
(See "Sending a priority fax" on page 64.)
Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed
remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use the
polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the
machine. (See "Using the polling option" on page 67.)
Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine
memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on the
same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine. Each
mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and password.
(See "Using Mailbox" on page 68.)
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.

In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on
any fax you send.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax No.
4. Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number.
5. Press OK.

Sending a fax
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.

Image tab
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select 2
Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.
5. When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number using
the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address on the right
side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax numbers.

•
•
•

Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the
original document being scanned. (See "Original Type" on page 65.)
Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax. (See
"Darkness" on page 65.)
Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns
as in newspaper originals. (See "Erase Background" on page 65.)

Faxing (Optional)_ 62

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press Redial.
5. Select Redial Term and Redial Times.

6. To add a number, press Add No..
7. Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a
fax to destinations.
•
•
•

When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the machine
start transmission. Or press the Job Status button, and select the
job you want to delete, press Delete.
If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message
asking to place another page.
While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email at
the same time. (See "Scanning originals and sending through
email (Scan to Email)" on page 52.)

Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up into the DADF.

6. Press OK.

Redialing the last number
1.
2.
3.
4.

Press Fax from the Main screen.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
Place the originals face up into the DADF.
Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent
fax numbers.
5. Select a fax number in the list and press OK.
The machine automatically begins to send.

Delaying a fax transmission

3.
4.
5.
6.

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.
Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
• If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/
Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers
and select a fax number.
7. Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax
machine.

You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.
5. Press On.
6. Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start Time
with left/right arrows.

Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually. (See
"Color Mode" on page 66.)

Automatic resending
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the
machine automatically redials the number.
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial
attempts, refer to the next following steps.

63 _Faxing (Optional)

•

If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name as
'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.

Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You can set
Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current
time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the time starting from
1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning message will appear and
the machine resets it to the current time.
7. Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.
To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.

8. Repeat step 5 to step 7.
As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can add
segments without any restriction.
9. After adding segments, press Send All.

RECEIVING A FAX
This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving
methods available.

Sending a priority fax
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority
transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between
stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before
transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.
5. Press On.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start to start the urgent fax job.

Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission
You can send multiple fax jobs in a single transmission.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment
list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Press Fax from the Main screen.
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
Press On to enable the job build function.

Changing the receive modes
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode to
another mode, refer to next steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive Mode.
4. Select the option.
• Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then
Start.
• Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax
reception mode.
• Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine
attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,
and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the
fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically
switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.
5. Press OK.
When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored
in the memory.

Receiving manually in Telephone mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine
begins receiving a fax.

Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax
mode

•
•
•

Off: Disables Job Build feature.
On: Enables Job Build feature.
Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen is displayed. Then user can select to keep
sending fax or stop.
• Delete: Deletes a segment.
• Delete All: Deletes all segments.
• Send All: Prints all segments.
• Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
• Cancel: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
5. Press Add Segment.
6. Place the originals face up in the DADF.
7. Press Start to start scanning a segment for fax job.

To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT
socket on the back of your machine. (See "Rear view" on page 18.)
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message
as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
•

•
•

•

If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to
EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after
a predefined number of rings.
If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set
the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering
machine, or the outgoing message from the answering machine
will interrupt your phone conversation.
While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy job.

Faxing (Optional)_ 64

Receiving faxes manually using an extension
telephone
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive
a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without
going to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press
the keys 9 on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote machine, try pressing 9 once again.
To change the 9 to, for example, 3 , follow the next steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.
4. Select On.
5. Press left/right arrows to display number 9.

Duplex
This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select
whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.
Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the
value.

•
•

1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.
2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.

Resolution
Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received
document.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the
values.

•

6. Press OK.

Receiving in secure receiving mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.
4. Select On.
5. Enter passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the
control panel.
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this case, the
received fax will be printed out.

Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or
printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon
as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.

Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option
will reduce the transmission time.
• Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small
characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix
printer.
• Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely
fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also
supports a Super Fine resolution.
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.

Original Type
You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a
document being scanned.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate option
on the screen and press OK.
• Text: For originals with text or line art.
• Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.
• Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance
the darkness degree and press OK.

ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS
Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as
resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of this
section.
The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want to
change the default setting on document settings, refer to Admin
Setting > General tab > Default Settings. (See "General settings" on
page 84.)

65 _Faxing (Optional)

Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned
colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select the appropriate
option and press OK.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.

•

Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background
is.
• Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo.

3. Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up
keyboard, and the fax number in the Fax No. area using the number
keypad on the control panel.

Color Mode
You can transmit a fax in color using this feature. But this feature only
applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.
• Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.
• Color: Transmits a fax in color.
Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually.
(See "Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)" on page 63.)

SETTING UP A FAX PHONEBOOK
Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and transmission
settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual and Group.

•

Individual: Stores up to 500 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which
are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No..
• Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to
several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.
Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list
on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of
many Individual entries.
The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed Dial No..

•
•

ID: Enters the name.
Speed Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.
• Fax No.: Enters a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area
code if necessary.
4. Press OK.

Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)
1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.
2. Press New.
3. Press the input area in Group Dial ID, then the keyboard pops up, enter
the name.
4. Select Group Dial No. with left/right arrows.

Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)
1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.

Edit: Changes the ID, Speed Dial No., and Fax No..
New: Creates the new Speed Dial No..
Delete: Deletes the selected Speed Dial No..
Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in
Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter ID.
• Detail: Shows ID, Fax No. and Included group information if it is
grouped. (See "Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)" on
page 66.)
• Apply: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list
in the Basic tab.
• Cancel: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.
2. Press New.

•
•

Group Dial ID: Enters the group name.
Group Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.
5. Press OK.
6. Select an entry from Speed Dial List, and press Add. Repeat this step
until you added entries you need.

•
•
•
•

Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane,
Group list.
7. Press OK to save the numbers.

Faxing (Optional)_ 66

Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web
Service
You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer
using SyncThru™ Web Service.

Individual
1. Open the web browser in your computer.
2. Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service
shows.
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)
3. Press Address Book > Individual.
4. Press Add.
5. Enter Name, Speed No., and Fax Number.
6. Press Apply.
Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.

5. Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode (The
four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you do not
want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you can store,
delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode.
If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in the
Mailbox. (See "Storing originals in Mailbox" on page 68.)

Group
1. Open the web browser in your computer.
2. Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service
shows.
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)
3. Press Address Book > Group.
4. Press Add Group.
5. Enter Group Name and Speed No..
6. Add individual ddresses to the fax group.
7. Press Apply.

USING THE POLLING OPTION
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a
document. This is useful when the person with the original document is not
in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the
machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the
document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has the
original.
To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the polling
feature.

6. Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data will
be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If you
select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.
7. Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.
8. Give the Passcode to the receiver.

Printing (Deleting) the polling document
1.
2.
3.
4.

Press Fax from the Main screen.
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).
Enter Passcode
Press OK.

Polling a remote fax
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote
machine.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.

The polling process is as follows:
1. Sender stores the originals in the machine. (See "Storing the originals
for polling" on page 67.)
2. Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.
3. Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when
requested. (See "Polling a remote fax" on page 67.)
4. Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.

Storing the originals for polling
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.

67 _Faxing (Optional)

Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific
time within 24 hours.
3. Enter Passcode and Destination Fax No using the number keypad on
the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode from sender with
the remote fax machine.
4. Press OK.

Polling from a remote Mailbox
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the Mailbox
of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be informed of
Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (See "Using Mailbox" on
page 68.)
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.

8. Press Edit Mailbox.

3. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are
filled with information from the sender.

9. Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel.
Up to 20 numbers you can enter.
10. Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either alphabet
or number up to 20 digits.
11. Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel.
If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the machine
does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as storing,
deleting, printing, receiving.
You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the
remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.
4. Press OK.

USING MAILBOX
You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the
receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to
program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the
Mailbox must be created.

12. Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax is
received into Mailbox.
13. Press OK.

Storing originals in Mailbox
Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document faced down.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

Creating Mailbox
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter the
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.
5. Press Mailbox Setup.
6. Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox List.
7. Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.

Faxing (Optional)_ 68

4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.

5. Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating Mailbox
in page 68.

5. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are
filled with information from the receiver.

6. Press OK.

PRINTING A REPORT AFTER SENDING A FAX
You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is
successfully completed or not.
The detailed information is available in advanced setup part. (See
"Printing a report" on page 93.)

6. Press OK.
•

•

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send Report.
4. Press On.

Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the
confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.
Printing a Mailbox
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.

Faxing to a remote Mailbox
To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you
can use the Send to Remote feature.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document face down.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.

69 _Faxing (Optional)

5. Press OK.

SENDING A FAX IN TOLL SAVE TIME
You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone
fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be stored in
machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Toll Save.

6. Press On.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send
Forward.
6. Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.
7. Press OK.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a
fax

7. Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right arrows.
8. Press OK.
9. Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.
10. Press OK.
11. Press OK.

ADDING DOCUMENTS TO A RESERVED DELAY
FAX JOB
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in
memory.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Send Batch.
6. Press On.
7. Press OK.
• When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in delay
fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to
reserved delay fax.

FORWARDING A RECEIVED FAX TO OTHER
DESTINATION
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other
destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive
the fax, this feature may be useful.
•
•

When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail server
and IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service.
If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a fax
with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination
by faxing.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other
destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in
the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive
Forward.
6. Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control
panel.
• If you want to set the star time and end time, select Start Time and
End Time.
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set
the Forward & Print.
7. Press OK.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an
email
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send
Forward.
6. Press On.
7. Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on
the display.
8. Press OK.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an
email
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Receive
Forward.

Faxing (Optional)_ 70

6. Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using
the keyboard on the display.
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set
the Forward & Print.
7. Press OK.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The
server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service prior to this
option on.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Send
Forward.
6. Press On.
7. Press OK.

SENDING A FAX FROM A COMPUTER
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine. To
send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the
printer driver. (See Software section.)

Sending a fax from your Computer
1. Open the document to be sent.
2. Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
3. Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window.
4. Click Print or OK.
5. Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by
server

1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The
server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service prior to this
option on.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
Press down arrow on the right side.
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Receive
Forward.
Press On.
Press OK.

If you want to use a cover page, check Use cover page.
Check Notify me on delivery, when the fax delivered to the recipients
successfully.
6. Click Send.
For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax, click Help.

SETTING UP THE END FAX TONE
The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can
be turned on or off.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Ending Sound.
6. Press On.
7. Press OK.

71 _Faxing (Optional)

Checking a sent fax list
You can check a sent fax list on your computer.
From the Start menu, click Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Network PC Fax > Fax Journal. Then, the Fax Journal
appears with the fax list you have sent.

using USB memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•

About USB memory
Understanding the USB screen
Plugging in a USB memory device
Scanning to an USB memory device

ABOUT USB MEMORY

•
•
•

Scan to USB
Changing the scan feature settings
Printing from a USB memory device

•

USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded
music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you
want to store or move.
You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device:
• Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device.
• Print data stored on a USB memory device.
• Format the USB memory device.

UNDERSTANDING THE USB SCREEN

"Printing from a USB memory device" on page 76.)
Scan to USB: You can specify image size, file format, or color mode
for each scanning to USB job. (See "Scan to USB" on page 73. )

PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE
The USB memory port on the left side of your machine is designed for USB
V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory
devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type
connector.

To use the USB feature, press USB on the Main screen. If the screen
displays an other menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.

When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your
machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.

Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the left side of
your machine.

Press USB Format, USB Print or Scan to USB.

•
•

USB Format: You can delete image files stored on an USB memory
device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device.
USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory
device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files. (See

Using USB memory device_ 72

•

•

Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in
operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. The
machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use’s
misuse.
If your USB memory device has certain features (example,
security key, security partition, booting disk, password settings
and so forth), do not use the USB memory device with your
machine. The files stored in the USB memory device may be
corrupted, or the machine may not automatically detect it. For
details about these features, see device’s User’s Guide.

•
•
•
•
•

Delete: Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
File Name: Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking
this field.
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Advanced tab

SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB
memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default
settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own scan
setting. (See "Changing the scan feature settings" on page 74.)
If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security
key, security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth),
do not use the USB memory device with your machine. The files
stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine
may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see
device’s User’s Guide.

Scanning
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
3. Press USB from the Main screen.
4. Press Scan to USB.
5. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Changing the scan feature settings" on page 74.)
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.
7. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device
from the machine.

SCAN TO USB
Basic tab

•
•

Image tab

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Name: The folder names on the USB memory device.
Date: Tha date which folders are made.
Select: Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.
New Folder: Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.
Detail: Views the details of currently selected folder or file.
Rename: Renames the folder or file name.

73 _Using USB memory device

Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See
"Original Size" on page 74. )
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See
"Original Type" on page 74.)
Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.
(See "Color Mode" on page 74.)
Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 75.)
Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See
"Erase Background" on page 75.)
Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to
Edge" on page 75.)
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Output tab

Original Size
The machine senses and determines the size of the original.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size. Use up/
down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and
press OK.

•
•
•
•
•

Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See
"Quality" on page 75.)
Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each
specific purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 75.)
File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
Format" on page 75.)
File Policy: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
Policy" on page 75.)
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Original Type
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a
document being scanned.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the
appropriate option and press OK.

CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after
that period, the options will be reset to default values.

Duplex
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned
are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of
the paper or both sides of the paper.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows
to toggle the values.

•
•
•

1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the
originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the
original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.

Resolution

•
•
•

Text: For originals that have text or line art.
Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs
together.
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Color Mode
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select the
appropriate option and press OK.

•
•

Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.

You can adjust document resolution.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right
arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you
get. But the scanning time may take longer.

Using USB memory device_ 74

•

Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.

Scan Preset
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Scan Preset.

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected
for Color Mode.

Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output
darker.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness. Press right arrow
to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.

•
•
•
•
•

Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning
colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select
the appropriate option and press OK.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.
• Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background
is.
• Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

•

Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality
documents.
High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with the
largest file size.
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file
size of the output.
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect
the highest quality images.
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file
size of output is small.
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.

File Format
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format.

Scan to Edge
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially
when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you
scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not
need to exclude the edges from the originals.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge. Select On and
press OK.

Quality
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality
you select a larger file size you get.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality.

•
•

PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.
Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.
• Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.
• JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
• BMP: Scans original in BMP format.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected
for Color Mode.

File Policy
You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with
the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same name
when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy.

When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.
•

75 _Using USB memory device

Rename: If the USB memory already has the same name when you
entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name
that is automatically programmed.

•

Overwrite:You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on USB as you store new job information.

PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, and PRN files.
If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security
key, security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth),
do not use the USB memory device with your machine. The files
stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine
may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see
device’s User’s Guide.
Direct Print option supported file types:
• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible.
• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be
printed directly from USB memory. See Software section to learn how to
create a PRN file.
• BMP: BMP Uncompressed
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
• JPEG: JPEG Baseline
• PDF: PDF 1.4 and below

To print a document from a USB memory device:
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.
2. Press USB from the Main screen.
3. Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file
name.
If there is a folder, select folder name and press Select.
4. Press USB Print.
5. Press Start on the control panel.

Using USB memory device_ 76

using document box
This chapter explains how to use Document Box with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•

About Document Box
Understanding the Document box screen

•

ABOUT DOCUMENT BOX

Storing documents to Document box

Document Box Screen

The Document Box feature makes it possible to store scanned data to the
hard drive. Users can send the stored data to various destinations such as
print, fax, e-mail, or an FTP/SMB server. The Document Box provides
three types of boxes: public (
) , secured (
) , and common (
).
The public box can be created by all users and all users can store data to
public boxes. The secured box can be created with password by all users.
This means that the only users who know the password can access to the
box and store their data. A common box is provided by default. Users
cannot create, edit, and delete the common box. When a user needs to
store a job that is not assigned to a box (i.e., fax receiving or PC printing in
store mode), the data will be stored in the common box by default.
You can also see the System Box tab from the Document Box screen.
The System Box is used for temporary data backup such as printing in
delayed mode, printing proof page.

UNDERSTANDING THE DOCUMENT BOX
SCREEN
To use the Document Box feature, press Document Box on the Main
screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press (
screen.

) to go to the Main

s

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

77 _Using document box

User Box tab: Create the box where you can save documents such
as the file you have printed, sent by email, or scanned. When you
create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The box
with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is called
public box.
System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you
cannot modify them.
Type: Shows the box is secured or not.
Box Name: Shows the box name.
Owner: Shows the user name of a box.
Date: Shows the date of a box created.
File: Shows the number of total files in the box.
Add: Lets you add more boxes.
Delete: Deletes the selected box.
Edit: Lets you modify a box name and an owner name.
Detail: Shows box information.
Report: Prints the information about the documents inside the
selected box.
Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.
Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.

Box Adding Screen
You can create a new box to store your scanned data. To add a new
Document Box, press Add on the Document Box screen.
The following are some constraints about the document box.
• You can create maximum 100 document boxes.
• A document box can contain up to 200 stored-documents.
• The length of a box name is limited to 20 characters.
•

Common (

) box is already created by default.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Add From Scan: Lets you add a new document from scanning.
Detail: Shows a document’s information.
Search: Searches a file with a document name or an owner name.
Edit: Lets you to modify a document name and an owner name.
Delete: Deletes the selected document.
Copy: Copies a selected document to another document box.
Move: Moves a selected document to another document box.
Combine: Merge documents located in two or more boxes.
Send To: Sends the selected document(s) to a destination such as
e-mail, fax, server, or USB.
Print: Prints the selected document(s) out.
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

STORING DOCUMENTS TO DOCUMENT BOX
This machine allows you to store the scanned data on the hard drive.

Storing documents from document box

•
•
•
•
•

Box Name: Enter a box name.
Owner: Enter the user name of the box's owner.
Secured Box: Check to make a secured-type box.
New Password: Enter a new password to access the box.
Confirm Password: Enter the password again.

You can scan orignals directly from Document Box menu.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
2. Press Document Box from the Main screen.
3. Press a document box with which you need to store a document.
4. Press Enter.

Edit a Box Screen
You can modify a box name or an owner name. To modify a Document
Box, select a box from the Document Box list and press Edit.

•
•

Box Name: Enter a new box name.
Owner: Enter a user name of a box.

5. Press Add From Scan.

Document List Screen
You can enter a document box by clicking Enter from the Document Box
screen, you can use the stored documents again.

6. Set the scan settings.
7. Press Start to begin scanning.

Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function
•
•
•
•

Document Name: Shows the document’s name.
Owner: Shows the user name of a document.
Date: Shows the date of a document stored.
Page: Shows the number of total pages in the document.

During copying, scanning, or faxing, you can save the scanned originals to
Document Box in your machine.

Using document box_ 78

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
2. Press Copy > the Basic tab > Saving to box.
Or press Scan > Scan to Email (Scan to Server or Scan to PC) > the
Basic tab > Saving to box.
Or press Fax > the Basic tab > Saving to box.

3. Enter the file name in the File Name field with the pop up keyboard.
Then press OK.

4. Select a destination box and press OK.
5. Press Start from the control panel to begin a job.

79 _Using document box

using standard workflow
This chapter explains how to use standard workflow with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•

About Standard Workflow
Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen

ABOUT STANDARD WORKFLOW
Standard Workflow is a feature for users to conveniently operate jobs with
pre-arranged task sets called workform. Standard Workflow makes it
possible to execute multiple jobs in a single session by defined the job
workform. Once you create a workform, you can reuse the same workflow
only with one-touch operation.

INPUT
Scan
Document Box
Fax

•

Various Operations with Workform

Workflow Screen
Favorite Tab
Favorite workform is a shortcut of public or private workform. You can
select a frequently-used public or private workform, and then the
workform appears on the favorite workform tab.
Fax input workform is automatically executed when receiving fax.
Therefore fax input workforms cannot be registered to a favorite
workform.

TRANSMIT
Email
FTP/SMB server
Document Box
Print
Fax

UNDERSTANDING THE STANDARD
WORKFLOW SCREEN
To use the Standard Workflow feature, press Standard Workflow on the
Main screen.
To switch to the other display screen, press the left or right arrow on
the display screen.

•

Execute: Start the job defined in the workform.

My Workform and Public Workform Tab

Using standard workflow_ 80

Transmit Tab

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

Type: Shows the workform is locked by the creator or not.
Name: Shows the workform name.
Input: Shows the workform’s input module name.
Transmit: Shows the workform’s transmit module name. If two or
more modules are added in transmit workform, this column displays
Multi without any icon.
Properties: Shows the workform’s perperties.
Create: Creates a new private workform.
Delete: Deletes the selected workform.
Edit: Lets you to modify a workform.
Detail: Shows detailed workform information.
Search: Searches a workform with a workform name.
Task: Imports a workform from USB, export a workform to USB,
copy or move a workform to public workform. It also makes a
shortcut in favorite workform tab by clicking Set to Favorite WF or
removes the shortcut by clicking Set to Normal WF.
Execute: Start the job defined in the workform.

Workform Creating Screen
You can create a new workform. To add a new workform, press Create on
the My Workform or Public Workform tab.

•
•

Transmit: Shows the workform’s transmit module name.
Status: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to
set every mandatory items of every assigned transmit modules.
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute and
Save button are enabled.

•

Add Module: Add transmit module(s).
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are correctly
configured for each module.
• Fax: See "Preparing to fax" on page 61.
• Email, Server: See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP
(Scan to Server)" on page 56.

•
•
•
•

Delete: Deletes the selected module.
Settings: Configures the setting values for the module.
Previous: Goes to the next tab.
Next: Goes to the next tab.

Properties Tab

You can create maximum 100 workforms.

Input Tab

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Input: Shows the workform’s input module name.
Status: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to
set every mandatory items of the assigned input module.
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute and
Save button are enabled.
Settings: Configures the setting values for the module.
Next: Goes to the next tab.

81 _Using standard workflow

Workform Name: Sets the workform name.
Delay Start: Schedule the start date and time to start.
Expired: Sets the expire date.
Secured: Locks the workform with password protection.
Previous: Goes to the next tab.

VARIOUS OPERATIONS WITH WORKFORM
User can operate various jobs with workforms. The following items show
some example cases.

Scan to multi-destination
You can scan a document once and send it to multiple destinations such as
email, SMB/FTP server, document box, and print.
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are correctly
configured for each module.
• Fax: See "Preparing to fax" on page 61.
• Email, Server: See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP
(Scan to Server)" on page 56.

Fax forwarding
You can forward the received fax to another destinations. To forward a fax,
your machine checks caller’s ID that the fax service provides. When the
caller is also Samsung’s fax machine, your machine checks the fax number
that the user defined for the machine information.
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 92.)
When you need to forward different destination for each caller, you can
create several workforms for each caller’s ID.

Auto redirection
If the fax transmission failed, the machine re-sends the fax image to the
user’s email address.
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 92.)

Delayed start feature
You can schedule the job’s execution time by setting Delay Start in
Properties tab when you creating a workform.

Notification feature
You can notify the job processing result to an email.
Make sure that you enabled Complete Notification in Machine
Setup > Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow
Management. (See "Standard Workflow Management" on page 92.)

Approval feature
Before executing the transmit module, you can get approval from an
administrator.
Make sure that you enabled Approve in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 92.)

Using standard workflow_ 82

machine status and advanced setup
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced machine
setup. Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•

Machine Setup
Browsing the machine’s status
General settings
Copy Setup
Fax Setup

MACHINE SETUP
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select the appropriate item for your occasion.

•
•
•
•
•

Network Setup
Security
Optional Service
Document Box Management
Printing a report
•

Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Admin Setting screen
Gives you access to detailed machine settings.
When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If the
administrator set the password, you have to enter the password every
time you want to use Admin Setting. (See "Setting the authentication
password" on page 29.)

•
•
•
•

Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.
Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine.
When you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)
Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.
Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Machine Status screen
Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.

•
•
•
•

General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as
location, date, time, and more. (See "General settings" on page 84.)
Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network and login. Also you can
set to enable the feature listed on the screen.
Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a
report of machine features. (See "Printing a report" on page 93.)
Back: Returns to the previous screen.

BROWSING THE MACHINE’S STATUS
You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the
machine.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab.

•
•

Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of the
machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.
Machine Info tab: Displays the detailed information about the
machine, and some options allows for validating your machine. (See
"Browsing the machine’s status" on page 83.)

83 _Machine status and advanced setup

OPTION

OPTION
Machine Details

Print/Report

Tray Status

Usage Counters

DESCRIPTION

Device Info

The sub-options available are Service Center
Registration and Contact Info. You may enter
information on service center and purchasing
point.

Date & Time

You can set the date and time. (See "Setting the
date and time" on page 29.)

Default Settings

•

DESCRIPTION
This option shows the customer support
information on the email address and the phone
number you stored from Admin Setting. Also, you
can check the machine's serial number, or the
hardware and software information specification.

•

You can print various helpful and informative
reports such as System Report, Fax Report and
Scan Report. (See "Printing a machine report" on
page 94.)

•

Default Window: Set the first window that will
appear on the display screen after turning on
the machine or waking up from the Power
Save. For example, if you select Fax as a
default window, the first window will be the
Basic tab of the Fax feature. In case you want
to show ID Copy as a default window, you need
to enable this feature in Default Option
previously.
Default Option: Changes all the default values
for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning and
paper at once. (See "Changing the default
settings" on page 30.)
Home: Changes the order of windows that will
appears on the display screen.
Depending on the optional kit you installed
or the category you selected, the selectable
options on the display screen may differ.

The screen shows the trays installed on your
machine, and their current configurations. Select
the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper
type and size.

Measurements

You can view the amount of each category that
your machine has printed so far. To print this
report, see "Printing a report" on page 93.

This option lets you change the measurement unit
to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric
separation (comma or period).

Timers

The machine cancels a printing job if data does
not be received in specific time.
• System Timeout: The machine returns to the
default value after certain time the machine
waits. You can set a time for maximum 10
minutes.
• Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a job
for a specific time period. You can set a time
period for at least an hour.

Language

It allows you to change the language that appears
on the touch screen.

Power Saver

You can reduce energy consumption by setting
these features. Power Saver has three options,
first Scan Power Save turns off the scanner lamp
under the glass. And Power Save turns off all the
fans within the machine after a certain time. Low
Power Save turns off the fans within the machine
except a core fan for the fuser unit. (See "Using
energy saving feature" on page 29.)

GENERAL SETTINGS
Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up the
machine parameters.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)
3. Press the General tab.

Machine status and advanced setup_ 84

OPTION
Tray Management

Altitude
Adjustment

DESCRIPTION
This feature allows you to select the tray and
paper you use for a printing job. Paper size, paper
type, and paper color options are adjusted here.
Tray Confirmation Message is to activate the
window asking whether you set the paper size and
type for the just opened tray.
• Auto Tray Switch: If tray1 and tray2 are filled
with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and
this option is On, then the machine continues
printing with paper in tray2.
• Auto Continue: When the paper is
mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with
the letter size paper, but the printing job needs
A4 size paper, the machine will wait for 30
seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized
paper. After 30 seconds, the machine
automatically starts printing with Letter sized
paper.
• Paper Substitution: When the paper is
mismatched, this option sets the machine print
A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice
versa.
• Wide A4: It is useful when printing in DOS
mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a
line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is
usual in DOS mode.
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure,
which atmospheric pressure is determined by the
height of the machine above sea level. This
feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height
district. Higher altitude location need to set this
feature to High 3, which affects print quality.

Output Options

Output Options is for, when the staples run out,
you to let the machine stop processing and wait to
refill the staples or continue the job. If you set
Within Job Offsetting to On, the output paper is
placed and sorted by printout-sets.

Contention
Management

This feature lets you to select the priority between
copy jobs and print jobs.
• Priority: Set the priority by numbering the job.
The machine starts from the least to the
highest number in order.
• First In, First Out: The machine does an
asked job in order.

Sound

You can adjust the loudness of the machine
sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's error
sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong
option. Press Selection to sound whenever you
press the selection from your touch screen.

Supplies
Management

The machine gives you the notification of the
imaging unit and toner cartridge to reorder, and
resets the used fuser counter, bias transfer roller,
feed roller and document feeder friction pad
counter.

Machine Test

The machine prints the test image patterns using
Image Quality Test Patterns.

85 _Machine status and advanced setup

OPTION

DESCRIPTION

HDD Spooling

To spool documents in HDD for the network
printing, select On.

Manual Image
Overwrite

You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on HDD as you store new job
information. To activate this feature, go to Admin
Setting > the Setup tab > Optional Service and
set the Manual Image Overwrite option to
Enable. After activating this feature, you can
overwrite the HDD by pressing Start in the
display.

Stored Job File
Policy

You can choose the file policy for generating file
name before you proceed with the job through
HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same
name when you entered a new file name, you can
rename or overwrite it.
• Rename: If the HDD memory already has the
same name when you enter a new file name,
the file will be saved as a different name that is
automatically programmed.
• Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete
previous job information on HDD as you store
new job information.

Country

You can change the country, then some the
values for fax and paper size will be changed
automatically for your country.
After installing the fax kit, you must change the
country.

Home Window
Background

To change the background image of the
machine's LCD UI to suit user’s preference, press
Custom, select a customized background image
file on the list, and then press Load.
Users can register their own background image
from SyncThru™ Web Service. Click Settings >
Machine Settings > System > Home Window
Customization, and add your images on the list.

Multi-Bin

You can set the default mode for multi-output bin
from the following options:
• Mailbox: Stacks the printouts in a bin that the
user selects from the output options in the
printer driver. You can modify each bin’s name
from Rename. You also can merge two or
more bins from Link Setup. By using Default
Setup, you can assign each job’s default bin
such as bin 2 for copy job, bin 4 for fax job, etc.
• Job Seperator: Stacks the printouts in each
seperated bin in sequence by job.
• Collator: Stacks the printouts in the same
order as the originals.
• Stacker: Stacks the printouts in bins one-byone. When bin 1 is full, printouts will be
stacked in bin 2.
You can only use this feature if you have
installed optional 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin
Mailbox.

OPTION
Stamp

DESCRIPTION
You can print optional information such as ID,
Machine Information, Date & Time, Comment,
and Page Number, on the output paper for
tracking.
• Items: Select item(s) to print on each paper.
• Position: Decide the position to stamp either
Top or Bottom of paper.
• Appearance: Decide the appearance of the
text either Opaque or Transparent. When you
select Opaque, the text background color is
filled with opaque white.

COPY SETUP
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup.

OPTION
Manual ID Copy
Setup

The fax options are different from country to country depending on
the international communication regulatory. If the display screen
does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained
herein, it means that the grayed out function does not supported in
your communication environment.
OPTION

DESCRIPTION

Machine ID & Fax
No

Enter the machine ID and fax number which will
be printed at the top of each page. Select the
country name. This option usually pre-set for user.

Receive Start Code

This feature works best when you are using an
extension telephone connected to the EXT socket
on the back of your machine. You can receive a
fax from someone you are talking to on the
extension telephone, without going to the fax
machine. (See "Receiving faxes manually using
an extension telephone" on page 65.)

Error Correction
Mode

It helps with poor line quality and makes sure any
faxes you send are properly transmitted to any
other ECM-equipped fax machines. Sending a fax
using ECM may take more time.

Fax Initial Setup

You can set Receive Mode for Telephone, Fax or
Answering Machine/Fax, and Dial Mode at either
Pulse (Dial Pulse) or Tone (Multi Frequency).
When you select Answering Machine/Fax, you
can receive a fax while the line is being used by
the answering machine. (See "Changing the
receive modes" on page 64.)
Contact your local telephone company for Dial
Mode setting information.

Ring to Answer

You can specify the number of times the machine
rings before answering an incoming call.

Receive Header

Use this option to automatically print the page
number, date and time of fax reception at the
bottom of each page.

Secure Receive

You may need to prevent your received faxes from
being accessed by unauthorized people. This
feature restricts printing of received faxes when
the machine is unattended. If you select this
option to On, all incoming faxes go into memory.
A four-digit Passcode is used when you want to
print out received faxes in memory. (See
"Receiving in secure receiving mode" on
page 65.)

DESCRIPTION
This option sets the ID copy settings such as the
number of images or copying positions manually.
(See "Copying ID with the manual ID copy
option" on page 45.)

FAX SETUP
This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax
system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and
needs.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Machine status and advanced setup_ 86

OPTION
Received Fax
Printing

Redial

Speaker Volume

Prefix Dial

DESCRIPTION

OPTION

DESCRIPTION

When receiving a fax containing pages longer
than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine can
reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the
paper loaded in the machine. If this feature is set
to Off, the machine cannot reduce the original to
fit onto one page. The original will be divided and
printed in actual size on two or more pages. If you
set this option to On and set the discard size to
10mm and the received data is longer then the
currently set paper in the tray, the machine
minuses the data that would have been on the
specified discard segment.

Output Tray

This feature lets you select the paper tray to use
for receiving a fax.

Toll Save

Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time
for saving. (See "Sending a fax in toll save
time" on page 69.)

Send Batch

The machine asks you whether you want to add
the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the fax
number you have dialed is same as the delay fax
number. (See "Adding documents to a reserved
delay fax job" on page 70.)

The machine can automatically redial a remote fax
machine, if it was busy. You can set the number of
redial attempts and an interval between attempts.
Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the
machine will not use this feature.

Fax Forward
Settings

You can forward a sent or received fax to other
destination by a fax or an email. (See "Forwarding
a received fax to other destination" on page 70.)

Fax Ending Sound

This setting selects whether the end fax tone is on
or off.
Set whether you turn on or off the sound of an end
of fax receiving. (See "Setting up the end Fax
tone" on page 71.)

Caller ID

If you have set this option, the machine
remembers the last twenty fax numbers.

This controls the sound when a fax actually starts
to transfer data. If this option is On, the machine
sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes. With
Comm. the machine sounds only until the
communication is succeeded. No sound with Off
option.
This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five
digits. This number will be dialed before any
automatic number is dialed. User may set this to
access a PABXa (example 9) or area code
number (example 02). When sending a fax, there
may be a job which has same recipient's number
in delay jobs. In this case, the machine can send
faxes to the same recipient in a batch.

Junk Fax Setup

The machine does not accept faxes sent from
remote stations if their numbers are stored in the
memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter a
maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press Junk
Fax Setup and Edit, then, enter the fax numer. If
you have set Caller ID enabled, you can browse
the last received fax numbers and select a fax
number from the list.

Ring Volume

This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you
select Off, the machine does not ring.

Dial Tone Volume

When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax, you
can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone
volume, you can use this feature. Value 1 is the
lowest volume. Use left/right arrows to adjust the
value.

Mailbox Setup

•

•

Document Policy: You can set the document
stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents
after. Select Delete On Poll of each option to
delete, Delete On Print to remain the data.
Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or
delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox
Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing options.
(See "Using Mailbox" on page 68.)
If you set the Notification option to On, you
are notified when a fax is received in
Mailbox. (See "Creating Mailbox" on
page 68.)

87 _Machine status and advanced setup

a. Private Automatic Branch Exchange

NETWORK SETUP
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before doing
that, you must have the information concerning the type of network
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to
use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine network.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.

OPTION
TCP/IP Protocol

DESCRIPTION
Select appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment.
There are lots of parameters to be set,
therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is,
or consult the network administrator.

OPTION

DESCRIPTION

Access Control
.

•
Apple Talk
Protocol

For Macintosh network environments, select this
option. This option provides packet transmission
and routing functionality for networking.

Ethernet Speed

Configure the network transmission speed.

Clear Setting

Reverts the network settings to the default values.

802.1x

You can select the user authentication for network
communication.
For details information consult the network
administrator.

IPv6

Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network
printing and managements.
• IPv6 Activate: When you select On, the Host
Name and Link-Local Address will
automatically be entered into the address field.
• DHCPv6 Configuration: If you have a
DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set
one of the option for default dynamic host
configuration.
• Routers: Use DHCPv6 only when
requested by a router.
• DHCPv6 Addresses: Always use DHCPv6
regardless of router request.
• DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6
regardless of router request.

SECURITY
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the
password.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Security.

•

Using SyncThru™ Web Service, administrators can classify
users into several groups according to each user’s role. Each
user’s authorization, authentication and accounting will be
controlled by the group’s role definition. For example, if a group
A only has authorization to use the copy function, users in
group A can only copy with the machine: they cannot fax or
scan. You can set this feature from SyncThru™ Web Service.
Click Security > User Access Control > Authority.
When the Single Sign-On (SSO) feature is enabled, users just
need to log in to the service only one time. Then the system
automatically checks the user’s authority based on the user ID
and password. The SSO feature is related to all of the security
functions such as authentication, authorization and accounting.
The SSO feature can be configured from SyncThru™ Web
Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an
administrator. (See "Managing your machine from the
website" on page 99.) And click Security > User Access
Control > Authentication> Options.

OPTION
Authentication
Method

OPTION

DESCRIPTION

No
Authentication

It disables Authentication
Method.

Local
Authentication

It enables the local authentication
mode. The user ID and password
is stored in an internal storage of
the device. The administrator can
see the user information from the
SyncThru™ Web Service >
Security > User Access Control
> User Profile menu.

Machine status and advanced setup_ 88

OPTION
Authentication
Method
(Continue)

OPTION
Network
Authentication

Foreign Device
Interface

DESCRIPTION
It enables the network
authentication mode. When the
users already belong to a serverbased networks, the Network
Authentication system can be
simply configured with the existing
server. Then the user can access
with the ID and password stored in
the remote authentication server.
To use any features in Network
Authentication mode, the users
have to get a certificate from SMB,
FTP, LDAP, or Keberos server
defined in SyncThru™ Web
Service.
When you install the optional FDI
kit, select Foreign Device
Interface Configuration Setup to
activate it.
• Job Timer: If there is not
enough credit, you can set the
machine to cancel a job right
away or wait a designated
amount of time for a deposit.
• Print Job Control: When it is
enabled, the both computer
printing and copying are
possible since the credit
remains. With Disable, only
the copy printing job needs the
credit. (which means a
computer printing a report or a
fax job needs no credits)
• Inhibit Services: When no
credit is left, the machine
disables the copy job only with
Copy Only. With All Services,
scanning service and copy job
are disabled.
• Internal Credits: It is used
when you cancel the job or
when the job is cancelled by
the device due to insufficient
credits (coin) or is canceled by
user’s request. If you select
Enable, the machine deposits
a credit equal to the number of
sheets that did not print out
correctly, then it prints next job
for free (for the amount
deposited). With Disable, even
if you cancel the printing job,
the machine includes jammed
paper in the count and the cost
of printing.
• Image Counter: Depends on
whether the machine counts
blank white pages.

89 _Machine status and advanced setup

OPTION
Accounting
Method

OPTION

DESCRIPTION

No Accounting

It disables accounting features.

Network
Accounting

You can set the network account
for users by using SyncThru™
Web Admin Service’s job
accounting plug-in. When the
users performs their copy, fax,
print, or scan service job with the
machine, the account module
records it. You can see the report
from the SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service.

Standard
Accounting

You can set the local account for
maximum 500 users. When the
users perform their copy, fax,
print, or scan service job with the
machine, the account module
records it. You can see the report
from Standard Acct. Usage
Report in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Print/Report tab
> Accounting Reports.
As the device itself can manage
user’s ID and usage without any
remote server, this feature is
highly suitable for small and
medium businesses.
The accounting system
regards storing a file to a
single server as a single
count.
• Accounting ID List: It shows
the accounting ID list. You can
add, edit, or delete the ID.
• Login Setting: You can
configure for user to login
either with ID and password
(ID & password Login) or with
ID only (ID only Login).
• Accounting ID List: It shows
the accounting ID list. You can
add, edit, or delete the ID.
• Login Setting: You can
configure for user to login
either with ID and password
(ID & password Login) or with
ID only (ID only Login).

User Authentication Method
If you are an administrator, you can enable authentication service before
using the machine to improve security for the device. If user
authentication service has been activated, only authorized users can
use the device. With authentication service, you also can give
permission to each user and set the maximum number of job executions
for a user.
The authentication service and accounting service can be enabled
independently. The services refer to the user information differently case
by case.
• Using Local Authentication only,
Using Local Authentication and Standard Accounting,
Using Local Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers to
User Profile from Security > User Access Control menu.
• Using Network Authentication only,
Using Network Authentication and Standard Accounting,
Using Network Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers
to the user information in the network authentication server. Disable
the user in User Profile to access the device.
• Standard Accounting only: Refers to the Standard Account List
from SyncThru™ Web Service > Security > User Access Control
> Accounting. (See "Managing your machine from the website" on
page 99.)
• Network Accounting only: Refers to the user information in network
authentication server.

Registering local authorized users
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service for your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method.
4. Select Local Authentication.
5. Click on the Apply button.
6. Click on Authority, and check a Role Name according to the current
user’s role.
• You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
7. Click on User Profile and check the users.
• You can add users by clicking the Add button.
• If you want add information to the Address Book, check the
Automatically add your information to Address Book.
• Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated.
• Select the user’s role from Role item.
8. Click on Apply.

Register authorized network users
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
on Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method.
4. Select Kerberos, SMB, or LDAP.
Before configuring network authentication, you need to configure
External Authentication Server from Security > Network
Security
5. Click on the Apply button.
6. Click on Authority, and check the Role Name according to the
current user’s role.
• Users can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.

7. Click on User Profile and check the users.
• You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
• If you want add the information to Address Book, check the
Automatically add your information to Address Book option.
• Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated.
• Select the user’s role from Role.
8. Click Apply.

Enabling network authentication by Kerberos
1. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
2. Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > Kerberos Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3. Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.
4. Select the IP Address or Host Name.
5. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 88.
7. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.
8. Click on Apply.

Enabling network authentication by SMB
1. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
2. Select Security > External Authentication Server > SMB Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3. Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.
4. Select IP Address or Host Name.
5. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 139.
7. Users can add a backup domain as in the previous step.
8. Click on Apply.
Users can add up to 6 alternate domains.

Enabling network authentication by LDAP
1. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
2. Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
4. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
5. Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
6. Select IP Address or Host Name.
7. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
8. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 389.
9. Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP
directory tree.
10. Select Authentication method. There are two options for LDAP
server login:
Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login ID

Machine status and advanced setup_ 90

(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.
11. Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.
12. Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).
13. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search
results, and search timeout.
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search the referral server if the
LDAP server has no data to reply to the query and if the LDAP
server has a referral server.

Log
OPTION
Job Log

You can enable (or disable) job log to record job
processing results. You can print the records in
Machine Setup > Admin Setting > Print/Report tab
> Job Log Report.

Operation Log

You can enable (or disable) operation log to record
various operations such as formatting the system,
creating document box, deleting file, etc. You can
print the records in Machine Setup > Admin Setting
> Print/Report tab > Operation Log Report.

Security Event
Log

You can enable or disable security event log to record
history such as user authentication, software
upgrading, access log, exporting or importing data,
etc. You can print the records in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Print/Report tab > Security Event
Log Report.

14. Select Search Name Order.
15. Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may
check this option if you want to search for information in a default
email address group.
16. Click on Apply.

User Accounting Method
Enabling Acccounting Method
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting >
Accounting Method.
4. Select Standard Accounting.

Change Admin. Password
You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication.

Information Hiding
OPTION
Hiding Level
Setting

If you want to allow users to login only with ID, then check
Authenticate with Login ID only.
5. Click on the Apply button.

Standard acccounting List
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting > Standard
Accounting List.
4. Select Standard Accounting.
You can add users to the accounting list by clicking on the Add
button. Enter a user’s ID, password and assign job limitation to
the user.
5. Click on the Apply button.

DESCRIPTION

Hiding Method
Setting

OPTION

DESCRIPTION

Show All
Information

All information in Job Status is
displayed to all users.

Show NonSecure
Information
Only

Non-secured information in Job
Status is displayed to all users.
The secured information, such as
secured received fax list or
secured print list, will be displayed
only to the owner.

Show Own
Information
Only

All information in Job Status is
displayed to the owner.

Char Counts Of
Information

Instead of the job name and
owner's name in Job Status, you
can see a sequence of asterisks
(*) characters.

Fixed Counts
Except First
Char

The job name and owner’s name
in Job Status display as many as
entered number of asterisks (*)
except the first character.

Fixed Counts

The job name and owner’s name
in Job Status display as many as
entered number of asterisks (*).

OPTIONAL SERVICE
When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to
install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those
features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.

91 _Machine status and advanced setup

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.

OPTION
Public Box
Deletion
OPTION

DESCRIPTION

Copy

Enables or disables the Copy menu from the main
screen.

Analog Fax

After installing the fax kit, select this option Enable
to use this machine as a fax machine.

Scan to Email

Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu from
the scan screen.

Scan to PC

Set Enable to activate the scanning and sending it
via network.

Scan to SMB

Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from
the scan screen.

Scan to FTP

Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from
the scan screen.

Manual Image
Overwrite

You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on HDD as you store new job
information. Set this option to Enable, go to the
General tab > Manual Image Overwrite, press
Start in the display to start the overwriting job.

Automatic Image
Overwrite

If you select Enable, the machine renews the HDD
memory when you save new job on it.

DOCUMENT BOX MANAGEMENT
You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in User Box.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Document Box Management.

DESCRIPTION
If you set this option to Administrators only, only
the administrator can delete the publicly stored
boxes in User Box, because the machine will asks
the password of administrator.

STANDARD WORKFLOW MANAGEMENT
You can set whether to use or not to use each features that standard
workflow provides.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management.

OPTION

DESCRIPTION

Auto Redirection

To create and execute a workform including the
auto redirection feature, enable this option.

Approve

To create and execute a workform including the
approval feature, enable this option.

Complete Report

To add a completion report in your workform,
enable this option.

Complete
Notification

To add a completion notification in your workform,
enable this option.

Default Fax

To create and execute a workform including the
fax feature, enable this option.

Machine status and advanced setup_ 92

PRINTING A REPORT

OPTION

You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etc.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Print/Report tab.

OPTION

OPTION

Print

Accounting
Reports

Report

Report
(Continue)

OPTION
Fax Report
Fax Report

You can set to print the
information of a fax reports.
• Multi Send Report: When you
fax to several destination, set
this option to print a
transmission report. On is to
print every time you send a
fax, the machine prints a
confirmation report. With OnError, only when the
transmission error occurred,
the report will be printed out.
• Fax Send Report
Appearance: You can select
whether the image on the
confirmation report shows or
not.
• Fax Sent/Received Report:
The machine stores the logs
on each transmission and
prints out every 50 logs with
this option On. It you select
Off, the machine stores the
logs but does not print.
• Fax Send Report: The
machine prints the
confirmation report after each
fax job, only when you send a
fax to one destination.

E-mail
Confirmation
Report

The report shows the job of
scanning and sending it via Scan
to Email.
• On: The report is printed
whether a job successfully
completed or failed.
• Off: No report is printed after
completing a job.
• On-Error: Only in case of error
occurrence, the machine prints
the report.

Scan to Server
Confirmation

The report shows the job of
scanning and sending it via SMB
and FTP.
• On: The report is printed
whether a job successfully
completed or failed.
• Off: No report is printed after
completing a job.
• On-Error: Only in case of error
occurrence, the machine prints
the report.

DESCRIPTION
You can print Network
Configuration, PS3 Font List,
PCL Font List and Schedule
Jobs Report. Schedule Jobs
Report shows the job list in
pending, in delayed faxing or the
Mailbox list as well.

Supplies
Information

You can print the amount of each
category that your machine has
printed so far.

Network Auth.
Log Report

It displays user login IDs and
emails.

Usage Page
Report

You can print the report on the
amount of printouts depending on
the paper size and type.

Accounting
Report

Prints the report of printing out
count for each login user.

Standard Acct.
Usage Report

Prints the used amount of
Standard Accounting

Standard Acct.
Remain Report

Prints the remained amount of
Standard Accounting

Configuration
Report

You can print a report on the
machine's overall configuration.

DESCRIPTION

You can also print machine's status information and browse status
with SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the web browser on your
networked computer and type the IP address of your machine.
When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information > Print
information.

93 _Machine status and advanced setup

maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes
•
•
•
•
•
•

Printing a machine report
Monitoring the supplies life
Finding the serial number
Sending the toner reorder notification
Sending the imaging unit reorder notification
Checking Document Box

PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT

•
•
•
•
•

Cleaning your machine
Maintaining the Toner cartridge
Maintaining the imaging unit
Maintenance Parts
Managing your machine from the website

See "Printing a report" on page 93.

4. Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not, and press Toner Low
Alert Level to set the remained life level.
5. Press OK.

MONITORING THE SUPPLIES LIFE

CHECKING DOCUMENT BOX

If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Machine Status.
3. Scroll down to browse the entire supplies list view the percentage
remaining.

The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.
Press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other
menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER
If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next
steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Machine Details.

SENDING THE IMAGING UNIT REORDER
NOTIFICATION
You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is
almost over and needs to be reordered.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit
Reorder Notification.
4. Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not, and press
Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.
5. Press OK.

SENDING THE TONER REORDER
NOTIFICATION
You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs to
be reordered.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge
Reorder Notification.

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

User Box tab: Create the box where you can save the document
such as the file you have printed, sent by email or scanned. When
you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The
box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is
called public box.
System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you
cannot modify them.
Type: Shows the box is secured or not.
Box Name: Shows the box name.
Owner: Shows the user name of a box.
Date: Shows the date of a box created.
File: Shows the number of total files in the box.
Add: Lets you add more boxes.
Delete: Deletes the selected box.
Edit: Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.
Detail: Shows box information.
Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.
Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.

CLEANING YOUR MACHINE
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality
problems occur.

Maintenance_ 94

•
•

Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we
recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to
clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and
might be harmful to you.

Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the
cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into
the machine.

7. Plug the power cable and turn the machine on.

Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the
day, as needed.
1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean
and dry.

Cleaning the inside
Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.

Cleaning the transfer unit
The cleaning the transfer unit within this machine is recommended for its
printing quality. The cleaning period is best once a year or once 10,000
pages printing.
1. Prepare a soft lint-free cloth.
2. Turn off the machine.
3. Unplug the power cable.
4. Open the side cover.

1
2
3
4

white sheet
DADF glass
scanner lid
scanner glass

4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean
and dry.
5. Close the scanner lid.

MAINTAINING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Toner cartridge storage

5. Wipe the surface of the transfer unit.

6. Close the side cover.

95 _Maintenance

Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,
temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the
recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and
longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in;
this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The
toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until
installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of
the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful
shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is
removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:
• Inside the protective bag from the original package
• Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end)
• Do not store consumables in;
- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
- Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
- Direct sunlight or room light.
- Dusty places.
- A car for a long period of time.
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.
- An environment with salty air.

Handling instructions
•
•
•

Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this
can cause internal damage and toner spillage.

Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of nonSamsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store
brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine
caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung
brand toner cartridge.

Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may
vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example,
if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you
may need to change the cartridge more often.

3. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to
release the toner cartridge.

Replacing the toner cartridge
When the toner cartridge is completely empty:
• Toner is empty. Replace toner cartridg appears on the display.
• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.Check the type of the
toner cartridge for your machine. (See "Supplies" on page 121.)
1. Open the side cover.

4. Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.

2.

Open the front cover.

5. Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.
6. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.

Maintenance_ 96

MAINTAINING THE IMAGING UNIT
Expected cartridge life

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into
the opening in the machine.

The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 80,000 pages. The
screen displays Imaging unit is worn. Replace with new one when the life
of the imaging unit is almost ended. Approximately 6,000 more pages can
be made after the warning message related to the imaging unit, but you
should have a replacement imaging unit in stock. Imaging unit yield may be
affected by the operating environment, optional, printing interval, media type
and media size.
• Imaging unit is worn. Replace with new one appears on the display.
For ordering information for imaging unit. (See "Supplies" on page 121.)
To prevent damage to the imaging unit, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.

Replacing the imaging unit
1. Open the side cover.

8. Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place.
9. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.

2.

Open the front cover.

10. Close the front cover, then the side cover.
After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without
powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it
may cause malfunction of the machine.

97 _Maintenance

3. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to
release the toner cartridge.

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Do not touch the green part, midside of the imaging unit. Use the
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.

4. Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.

9. Unpack the new imaging unit and slide it into place, making sure not to
touch the surface of the imaging unit.

10. Slide the toner cartridge in until it locks in place.
11. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.
The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the imaging unit.
5. Pull the used imaging unit out.

12. Close the front cover, then the side cover.

6. Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.
7. Open the carefully pull the seal tape out of the cartridge.
8. Thoroughly shake the imaging unit side to side five or six times.

After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without
powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it
may cause malfunction of the machine.

Maintenance_ 98

MAINTENANCE PARTS
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts
and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items
will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life
span of each item has expired.
ITEMS

YIELD (AVERAGE)

DADF rubber pad

Approx. 50,000 pages

Multi-purpose tray rubber pad

Approx. 50,000 pages

DADF feed roller

Approx. 250,000 pages

Multi-purpose tray feed roller

Approx. 200,000 pages

Transfer roller

Approx. 125,000 pages

Fuser unit

Approx. 250,000 pages

Paper Feed roller

Approx. 250,000 pages

We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized
service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The
warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after
their lifespan.

MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE
WEBSITE
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Samsung’s
SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™
Web Service to:
• View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
• Change the printer properties.
• Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the
machine’s status.
• Get support for using the machine.

To access SyncThru™ Web Service:
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
2. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
SyncThru™ Web Service allows administrator to set up the
machine. If you want to access Settings or Security menu, login
first. Press Login button, and enter user ID and password from the
pop-up window. Then press LOGIN button.
The initial administrator’s setting is as follows:
• The default ID: admin
• The default password: sec00000

99 _Maintenance

troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•

Tips for avoiding paper jams
Clearing document jams
Clearing paper jams

•
•

Understanding display messages
Solving other problems

TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 100.
• Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (see
"Loading paper" on page 38)
• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.
• Use only recommended print media. (See "Setting the paper size and
type" on page 40.)
• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in
the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.
• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:
Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the
tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex)
is not supported.
3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.

In the printer properties window, set the page orientation to be rotated
90 degrees. See Software section.

CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming
message appears on the display screen.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document gently
and slowly.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or
mixed paper-type originals.
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.
2. Open the DADF cover.

If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed. (See
"Roller misfeed" on page 101.)

4. Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any, in
the DADF.

Troubleshooting_ 100

Misfeed of exiting paper

Roller misfeed

1. Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.
2. Open the DADF cover.

1. Open the scanner lid.
2. Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by
carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.

3. Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out
of the DADF.

1 scanner lid
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.
3. Open the white document background.

4. Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the
documents back in the DADF.

4. Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.

101 _Troubleshooting

5. Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then load
the removed pages back into the DADF.

In the tray 1
1. Pull out the paper tray to open. After you pull it out completely, lift the
front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine.

CLEARING PAPER JAMS
When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.
MESSAGE

LOCATION OF JAM

GO TO

Paper Jam in tray 1,
Paper Jam in tray 2,
Paper Jam in tray 2
(HCF),
Paper Jam in tray 3,
Paper Jam in tray 3
(HCF),
Paper Jam in tray 4,
Paper Jam in MP
tray

In the paper feed area
(tray 1, optional tray, or
multi-purpose tray)

See "In the multipurpose tray" on
page 106.
See "In the optional
tray" on page 103.
See "In the optional
high capacity
feeder" on page 104.

Paper Jam in exit
area

In the fuser area or
around the toner
cartridge

See "In the fuser area
or around the toner
cartridge" on page 106.

Paper Jam inside of
machine

In the paper exit area

See "In the paper exit
area" on page 106.

Paper Jam at the
bottom of duplex
path,
Paper Jam at the
top of duplex path,
Paper Jam inside of
duplex path

In the duplex unit

See "In the duplex unit
area" on page 107.

Paper jam in front of
finisher

In the stacker unit

See "Paper jam in front
of finisher" on
page 107.

Paper jam inside
finisher, Paper jam
inside finisher’s
duplex

In the stacker unit

See "Paper jam inside
finisher, Paper jam
inside finisher’s
duplex" on page 107.

Paper jam at exit of
finisher

In the stacker unit

See "Paper jam at exit
of finisher" on
page 108.

2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.

Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and then
close it to clear the error message on the display.
If there is any resistance, and the paper does not move immediately when
you pull, stop pulling. Then:
3. Open the side cover.

To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and
slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the
jam.

Troubleshooting_ 102

Do not touch the shiny imaging unit surface. Scratches or smudges
will result in poor print quality.
4. Carefully remove the misfeed paper in the direction shown.

In the optional tray
This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the
optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other optional trays,
since the method is same as the tray 2.

1. Open the outer cover in tray 2.

5. Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of the
Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine,
then insert it completely.
2. Open the inner cover of tray 2.

3. Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper

103 _Troubleshooting

in this area, stop and go to step 4.
4. Pull out the optional tray 2.
5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the
machine.

In the optional high capacity feeder
1. Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 6.
6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the paper,
pull it out gently and slowly.

2. Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.

7. Insert the tray 2 and close the two covers.

Troubleshooting_ 104

3. Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and
slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 4.
4. Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.
5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the
machine.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 6.
If you do not see any paper in this area, stop and go to step 6.

105 _Troubleshooting

6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and slowly in
order to avoid tearing the paper.

7. Insert the optional high capacity feeder and close the two covers.

In the multi-purpose tray

2. Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.

1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.

2. Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

3. Close the side cover.

In the paper exit area
1. Open the side cover.
2. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.

In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the
machine.

3. Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

1. Open the side cover.

Troubleshooting_ 106

In the duplex unit area
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make sure
that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.
1. Open the side cover.
2. Release the guide to pull the jammed paper easily.

2. Press the right part of lever (1c) and hold still, then push the stacker
to the left to release the stacker.

3. Remove the jammed paper.
4. Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.
5. Close the stacker front cover.
3. Remove the jammed paper.

Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher’s
duplex
1. Open the stacker front cover.

4. Close the side cover.

In the stacker (finisher)
Paper jam in front of finisher
1. Open the stacker front cover.

107 _Troubleshooting

2. Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever 1b
down as well.

3. Remove the jammed paper.

UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES
Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control
panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables below
to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if necessary.
Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order.
•

If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the
printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.
When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the
service representative with the contents of display message.
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on
options or models.
[yyy] indicates the part of the machine.
[zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service
center, this error code help to handle the problem.

•
•
•
•
•

You may see an exclamation mark (
) or a cross mark (
) on
the upper left of the display, in that case, press the question mark
to browse detailed information on the supplies.

4. Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.

.

MESSAGE

Paper jam at exit of finisher
1. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.

SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS

MEANING

[yyy] is worn.
Replace with new
one

The life of the part
expires totally.

Replace the part with a
new one. Call for
service.

DC motor does not
operate: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on

There is a problem in
the control of DC
motor unit.

Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.

Did not supply
enough toner.
Remove seal tape &
reinstall

Not supplied toner to
the imaging unit.

•
•

•

Remove the sealing
tape from the
imaging unit.
Thoroughly roll the
toner cartridge five or
six times, and
reinstall it.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again.

Did not supply
enough toner.
Please open/close
door

The machine received
several papers with
many images, and it
cannot supply the
toner properly.

Open side door and
close it. If the problem
still persists, please call
for service.

Fax memory is
almost full. Print or
remove received fax
Job

There is no more
available fax memory.
No more fax data can
be received.

Delete the received fax
data in the memory to
secure memory. Call
for service.

Fax memory is full.
Print or remove
received fax Job

Available fax memory
is now 1MB.

Delete the received fax
data in the memory to
secure memory. Call
for service.

Finisher door is
open. Close it

The finisher cover is
not securely latched.

Close the finisher until it
locks into place.

Troubleshooting_ 108

SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS

MESSAGE

MEANING

Finisher error: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on

There is a problem in
the finisher unit.

Turn the machine off
and reinstall the finisher
again. Check that the
finisher cable is
connected properly. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.

Fuser error: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on

There is a problem in
the fuser unit working.

Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.

Fuser unit is not
installed correctly.
Install it

The fuser unit is not
installed or correctly.

Install the fuser unit.
Call for service.

Imaging unit is
empty. Replace it

The toner in the
imaging unit has run
out.

Replace the imaging
unit with a Samsunggenuine toner cartridge.
(See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on
page 97.)

MESSAGE

MEANING

SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS

Original paper is too
long for scanner.
Check size

Oversized document
or double-feeding of
originals.

Open the DADF cover
and remove the
jammed original. (See
"Clearing document
jams" on page 100.)
Check the document
size whether it is
supported. (See "DADF
document size" on
page 126.)

Original paper jam
in front of scanner

The originals are
jammed in DADF.

Open the DADF cover
and remove the
jammed original. (See
"Clearing document
jams" on page 100.)

Original paper jam
in front of scanner
duplex path

Paper has jammed
during duplex printing
in the DADF.

Clear the jam. (See
"Clearing document
jams" on page 100.)

Original paper jam
inside of scanner

The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the gate
sensor within the
correct time after
actuating the scan
sensor.
When the machine is
on, jammed paper is
detected in the DADF.

Open the DADF cover
and remove the
jammed original. (See
"Clearing document
jams" on page 100.)

Original paper jam
while reversing
paper in scanner

The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the duplex
sensor within the
correct time when the
document was fed the
wrong way.

Lift up the document
input tray and remove
the jammed original.
(See "Clearing
document jams" on
page 100.)

Paper jam at exit of
finisher

Paper jammed in the
stacker exit part.

Pull jammed paper
from the stacker exit.

Paper Jam at the
bottom of duplex
path

Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.

Clear the jam. (See "In
the duplex unit area" on
page 107.)

Imaging unit is not
compatible. Check
user’s guide

The imaging unit you
have installed is not
for your machine.

Install a Samsunggenuine imaging unit,
designed for your
machine.

Imaging unit is not
installed. Install it

The imaging unit is
not installed, or the
CRUM (Consumer
Replaceable Unit
Monitor) in the
cartridge is not
connected.

Install the imaging unit.
If it is already installed,
try to reinstall the
imaging unit.
If the problem persists,
please call for service.

The imaging unit is at
the end of its life.
When the imaging unit
replacement message
appears on the screen
and if you select
Continue, this
message displays.

Replace a imaging unit
with a Samsunggenuine imaging unit.
(See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on
page 97.)

LSU error: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on

There is a problem in
the control of LSU
unit.

Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.

Motor does not
operate: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on

There is a problem in
the control of motor
unit.

Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.

Paper Jam in exit
area

Paper has jammed in
the fuser area.

Clear the jam. (See "In
the fuser area or
around the toner
cartridge" on
page 106.)

Original paper does
not feed in scanner

The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the scan
sensor within the
correct time after
actuating the
registration sensor.

Open the DADF cover
and remove jammed
original. (See "Clearing
document jams" on
page 100.)

Paper jam in front of
finisher

Paper jammed in the
stacker.

Open the stacker door
and remove jammed
paper by lowering
guide 1a or 1b.

Imaging unit is
worn. Replace with
new one

109 _Troubleshooting

Paper Jam at the top
of duplex path

Paper jam inside
finisher

MESSAGE

MEANING

SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS

Paper Jam in MP
tray

Paper Misfed from
multi-purpose tray

Clear the jam. (See "In
the multi-purpose
tray" on page 106.)

Paper Jam in tray 1

Paper misfed from
tray
Or paper has jammed
in the tray feed area.
Or the tray cover is
opened.

Clear the jam. (See "In
the tray 1" on page 102
and see "In the optional
tray" on page 103 and
see "In the optional
high capacity
feeder" on page 104)

Paper Jam in tray 2
Paper Jam in tray 2
(HCF)

MESSAGE

MEANING

Staple cartridge is
not installed. Install
it in finisher

The staple cartridge is
not installed.

Install the staple
cartridge following the
steps explained on the
back of the finisher
door. (See "Replacing
the Stapler" on
page 124.) If you want
to continue the print job
and disregard of this
error message, go to
Admin Setting to
adjust the option. (See
"General settings" on
page 84.)

System error: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on

There is a problem in
the system operation.

Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.

This IP address
conflicts with an IP
address already in
use. Check it

The IP address is
used in other place
elsewhere.

Check the IP address
or obtain a new IP
address.

Toner cartridge is
not compatible.
Check user’s guide

The toner cartridge
you have installed is
not for your machine.

Install a Samsunggenuine toner cartridge,
designed for your
machine.

Toner cartridge is
not installed. Install
it

The toner cartridge is
not installed or the
CRUM (Consumer
Replaceable Unit
Monitor) in the
cartridge is not
properly connected.

Try to reinstall the toner
cartridge.

Toner cartridge is
worn. Replace with
new one

The toner cartridge is
at the end of its life.
When the toner
cartridge replacement
message appears on
the screen and if you
select Continue, this
message displays.

Rplace a toner
cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
toner cartridge. (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 96.)

Toner is empty.
Replace toner
cartridge

The lifespan of the
toner cartridge which
the arrow indicates is
reached.

This message appears
when the toner is
completely empty, and
your machine stops
printing. Replace the
toner cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
toner cartridge. (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 96.)

Toner is low. Order
new toner cartridge

The toner cartridge is
almost empty.

Ensure a replacement
cartridge is in stock.

Too much paper in
finisher stacker.
Remove printed
paper

The stacker is full of
printouts.

Remove printouts from
the stacker.

Paper Jam in tray 3
Paper Jam in tray 3
(HCF)
Paper Jam in tray 4
Paper jam inside
finisher’s duplex

Paper jammed in the
stacker.

Open the stacker door
and remove jammed
paper by lowering
guide 1a or 1b.

Paper Jam inside of
duplex path

Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.

Clear the jam. (See "In
the duplex unit area" on
page 107.)

Paper Jam inside of
machine

Paper has jammed in
the registration area.

Clear the jam. (See "In
the paper exit area" on
page 106.)

Scanner locking
switch is locked or
another problem
occurred

The CCD (Charged
Couple Device) lock
has been locked. The
CCD does not detect
its home location or
move.

Unlock the CCD lock.
(See "Front view" on
page 18.) Or turn off
the machine and on
again. Try again. If the
problem persists, call
for service.

Shake toner
cartridge

The toner supply is
low.

Thoroughly roll the new
cartridge five or six
times to distribute the
toner evenly inside the
cartridge.

Staple cartridge is
empty. Replace it

Stapler is run out.

Order Staple Cartridge.
(See "Staple
Cartridge" on
page 121.) And replace
it. (See "Replacing the
Stapler" on page 124.)

SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS

Troubleshooting_ 110

MESSAGE

MEANING

SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS

Too much paper in
output bin tray.
Remove printed
paper

The printed papers
are full on the output
tray.

Remove printed outs
from the output tray.

Use Auxiliary
Access

The credit is not
enough to access the
job according to
Foreign Device.

Insert credit into the
Foreign Device.

SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is
corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Touch screen problem
CONDITION
The touch screen
does not show
anything.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the
problem persists, please call for service.

Paper feeding problems
CONDITION

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Paper is jammed
during printing.

Clear the paper jam. (See "Clearing paper
jams" on page 102.)

Paper sticks
together.

•
•
•
•

Multiple sheets of
paper do not feed.

•
•

Paper does not feed
into the machine.

•
•
•
•

•

111 _Troubleshooting

Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.
(See "Specification on print media" on
page 35.)
Make sure that you are using the correct type
of paper. (See "Specification on print
media" on page 35.)
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the
paper.
Humid conditions may cause some paper to
stick together.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and
weight.
If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,
clear the paper jam. (See "Clearing paper
jams" on page 102.)
Remove any obstructions from inside the
machine.
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that
meets the specifications required by the
machine. (See "Specification on print
media" on page 35.)
If an original does not feed into the machine,
the DADF rubber pad may require to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.

CONDITION
The paper keeps
jamming.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
•

•

•
•

There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing
on special materials, use the multi-purpose
tray.
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use
only paper that meets the specifications
required by the machine. (See "Specification
on print media" on page 35.)
There may be debris inside the machine. Open
the front cover and remove the debris.
If an original does not feed into the machine,
the DADF rubber pad may need to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.

Transparencies
stick together in the
paper exit.

Use only transparencies specifically designed for
laser printers. Remove each transparency as it
exits from the machine.

Envelopes skew or
fail to feed correctly.

Ensure that the paper guides are against both
sides of the envelopes.

Printing problems
CONDITION
The machine
does not print.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The machine is not
receiving power.

Check the power cord
connections. Check the
power switch and the power
source.

The machine is not
selected as the
default printer.

Select Samsung SCX-6545
Series PCL 6 (or Samsung
SCX-6545 Series PS) as
your default printer in your
Windows.

Check the machine for the following:
• The side cover is not closed. Close the side
cover.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See
"Clearing paper jams" on page 102.)
• No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See "Loading
paper" on page 38.)
• The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not
installed. Install the toner cartridge or the imaging
unit.
If a system error occurs, contact your service
representative.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is not
connected properly.

Disconnect the printer cable
and reconnect it.

The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is
defective.

If possible, attach the cable
to another computer that is
working properly and print a
job. You can also try using a
different printer cable.

The port setting is
incorrect.

Check the Windows printer
setting to make sure that the
print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has
more than one port, make
sure that the machine is
attached to the correct one.

The machine may
be configured
incorrectly.

Check the printer properties
to ensure that all of the print
settings are correct.

The printer driver
may be incorrectly
installed.

Repair the printer software.
See Software section.

The machine is
malfunctioning.

Check the display message
on the control panel to see if
the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a
service representative.

Troubleshooting_ 112

CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

The machine
does not print.
(Continued)

The document size
is so big that the
hard disk space of
the computer is not
enough to access
the print job.

Get more hard disk space
and print the document
again.

The paper option
that was selected in
the printer properties
may be incorrect.

For many software
applications, the paper
source selection is found
under the Paper tab within
the printer properties. Select
the correct paper source.
See the printer driver help
screen.

The machine
selects print
materials from
the wrong paper
source.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

A print job is
extremely slow.

The job may be very
complex.

Reduce the complexity of the
page or try adjusting the print
quality settings.

Half the page is
blank.

The page orientation
setting may be
incorrect.

Change the page orientation
in your application. See the
printer driver help screen.

The paper size and
the paper size
settings do not
match.

Ensure that the paper size in
the printer driver settings
matches the paper in the
tray.
Or, ensure that the paper
size in the printer driver
settings matches the paper
selection in the software
application settings you use.

The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.

The printer cable is
loose or defective.

Disconnect the printer cable
and reconnect. Try a print job
that you have already printed
successfully. If possible,
attach the cable and the
machine to another computer
and try a print job that you
know works. Finally, try a
new printer cable.

The wrong printer
driver was selected.

Check the application’s
printer selection menu to
ensure that your machine is
selected.

The software
application is
malfunctioning.

Try printing a job from
another application.

The operating
system is
malfunctioning.

Exit Windows and reboot the
computer. Turn the machine
off and then back on again.

113 _Troubleshooting

CONDITION
Pages print, but
they are blank.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The toner cartridge
is defective or out of
toner.

Redistribute the toner, if
necessary.
If necessary, replace the
toner cartridge.

The file may have
blank pages.

Check the file to ensure that
it does not contain blank
pages.

Some parts, such as
the controller or the
board, may be
defective.

Contact a service
representative.

The printer does
not print PDF file
correctly. Some
parts of
graphics, text, or
illustrations are
missing.

Incompatibility
between the PDF
file and the Acrobat
products.

Printing the PDF file as an
image may enable the file to
print. Turn on Print As Image
from the Acrobat printing
options.

Your machine
has an odd smell
during initial
use.

The oil used to
protect the fuser is
evaporating.

After printing about 100 color
pages, there will be no more
smell. It is a temporary issue.

The print quality
of photos is not
good. Images
are not clear.

The resolution of the
photo is very low.

Reduce the photo size. If you
increase the photo size in the
software application, the
resolution will be reduced.

The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.

If you are under the
DOS environment,
the font setting for
your machine may
be set incorrectly.

Suggested solutions: Change
the language setting. (See
"Changing the display
language" on page 29.)

Before printing,
the machine
emits vapor near
the output tray.

Using damp paper
can cause vapor
during printing.

This is not a problem. Just
keep printing.

It will take longer to
print when you print a
PDF file as an image.

Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the
problem.
CONDITION

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Light or faded print

If a vertical white streak or faded area appears
on the page:
• The toner supply is low. You may be able
to temporarily extend the toner cartridge
life. If this does not improve the print
quality, install a new toner cartridge.
• The paper may not meet paper
specifications; for example, the paper may
be too moist or rough. (See "Specification
on print media" on page 35.)
• If the entire page is light, the print
resolution setting is too low or the toner
save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution
and turn the toner save mode off. See the
help screen of the printer driver and refer to
Software section, respectively.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs
cleaning. Contact a service representative.
• The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,
contact a service representative.

Toner specks

•

•
•

Dropouts

The paper may not meet specifications; for
example, the paper may be too moist or
rough. (See "Specification on print
media" on page 35.)
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the
inside of your machine. Contact a service
representative.
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact
a service representative.

If faded areas, generally rounded, occur
randomly on the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective.
Try reprinting the job.
• The moisture content of the paper is
uneven or the paper has moist spots on its
surface. Try a different brand of paper.
(See "Specification on print media" on
page 35.)
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing
processes can cause some areas to reject
toner. Try a different kind or brand of
paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and
set type to Thick Paper. Refer to the
Software section for details.
• If these steps do not correct the problem,
contact a service representative.

CONDITION

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

White Spots

White spots appears on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from
a paper falls to the inner devices within the
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.
Clean the inside of your machine. (See
"Cleaning the transfer unit" on page 95.)
Contact a service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning.
Contact a service representative.

Vertical lines

If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface(drum part) of the imaging unit
inside the machine has probably been
scratched. Remove the imaging unit and
install a new one. (See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page 97.)
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.
Contact a service representative.

Color or Black
background

If the amount of background shading becomes
unacceptable:
• Change to a lighter weight paper. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
• Check the environmental conditions: very
dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level
of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can
increase the amount of background
shading.
• Remove the old imaging unit and then,
install a new one. (See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page 97.)

Toner smear

•
•
•

Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a
service representative.
Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
Remove the imaging unit and then, install a
new one. (See "Replacing the imaging
unit" on page 97.)

Troubleshooting_ 114

CONDITION
Vertical repetitive
defects

Background scatter

A
Misformed
characters

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side
of the page at even intervals:
• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a
repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a
cleaning sheet through several times to
clean the cartridge; contact a service
representative. After the printout, if you still
have the same problems, remove the
imaging unit and then, install a new one.
(See "Replacing the imaging unit" on
page 97.)
• Parts of the machine may have toner on
them. If the defects occur on the back of
the page, the problem will likely correct
itself after a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged.
Contact a service representative.
Background scatter results from bits of toner
randomly distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing
with a different batch of paper. Do not open
packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much
moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an
envelope, change the printing layout to
avoid printing over areas that have
overlapping seams on the reverse side.
Printing on seams can cause problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire
surface area of a printed page, adjust the
print resolution through your software
application or in printer properties.
•

•

If characters are improperly formed and
producing hollow images, the paper stock
may be too slick. Try different paper. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
If characters are improperly formed and
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit
may need service. Contact a service
representative.

CONDITION
Curl or wave

•
•
•

Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
Ensure that the paper or other material is
loaded correctly and the guides are not too
tight or too loose against the paper stack.

•
•

•

Wrinkles or creases •
•
•

Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the
machine. Contact a service representative.

Solid Color or
Black pages

•
•

A

•

•
•
•
•

115 _Troubleshooting

Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. Both high
temperature and humidity can cause paper
curl. (See "Specification on print media" on
page 35.)
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Back of printouts
are dirty

Loose toner
Page skew

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The imaging unit may not be installed
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert
it.
The imaging unit may be defective and need
replacing. Remove the imaging unit and
install a new one. (See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page 97.)
The machine may require repair. Contact a
service representative.

Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a
service representative.
Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
Remove the imaging unit and then, install a
new one. (See "Replacing the imaging
unit" on page 97.)
If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.

CONDITION
Character Voids

A
Horizontal stripes

Curl

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Character voids are white areas within parts of
characters that should be solid black:
• If you are using transparencies, try another
type of transparency. Because of the
composition of transparencies, some
character voids are normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface
of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it
around.
• The paper may not meet paper
specifications. (See "Specification on print
media" on page 35.)
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears
appear:
• The imaging unit may be installed
improperly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
• The imaging unit may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a
new one. (See "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 96.)
• If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not
feed into the machine:
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray.
Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and
set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the
Software section for details.

An unknown
image repetitively
appears on a next
few sheets or
loose toner, light
print, or
contamination
occurs.

Your printer is probably being used at an
altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality
such as loose toner or light imaging. You can
set this option through Paper or Printer tab in
printer driver’s properties. (See "Altitude
adjustment" on page 29.)

CONDITION
Copy image is
skewed.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
•
•

Blank copies print
out.

Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.

Image rubs off the
copy easily.

•
•

Frequent copy paper
jams occur.

•

•

•

Toner cartridge
produces fewer
copies than expected
before running out of
toner.

•

•
•

CONDITION
The scanner does
not work.

•

•

Copies are too light
or too dark.

Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or
lighten the backgrounds of copies.

Smears, lines,
marks, or spots
appears on copies.

•

•
•

•

If the defects are on the original, press
Light and Dark arrows to lighten the
background of your copies.
If there are no defects on the original, clean
the scan unit. (See "Cleaning the scan
unit" on page 95.)

Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with
a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper
guides, if necessary.
Ensure that the paper is the proper paper
weight. 80 g/m2 bond paper is
recommended.
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy
paper remaining in the machine after a
paper jam has been cleared.
Your originals may contain pictures, solids,
or heavy lines. For example, your originals
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
The machine may be turned on and off
frequently.
The scanner lid may be left open while
copies are being made.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Copying problems
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Replace the paper in the tray with paper
from a new package.
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper
in the machine for extended periods of
time.

Scanning problems

•

CONDITION

Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.
Check that the copy paper is loaded
correctly.

•

Make sure that you place the original to be
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or
face up in the DADF.
There may not be enough available memory
to hold the document you want to scan. Try
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try
lowering the scan resolution rate.
Check that the printer cable is connected
properly.
Make sure that the printer cable is not
defective. Switch the cable with a known
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
Check that the scanner is configured
correctly. Check scan setting in the
SmarThru Configuration or the application
you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port.
In case of use of account feature, make sure
that you have extra scan count remained.
For example, if you try to scan 10-page
document while you have 5 scan count left,
the scan job would be canceled.

Troubleshooting_ 116

CONDITION
The unit scans very
slowly.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
•
•
•

Message appears on
your computer
screen:
• “Device can't be
set to the H/W
mode you want.”
• “Port is being used
by another
program.”
• “Port is Disabled.”
• “Scanner is busy
receiving or
printing data.
When the current
job is completed,
try again.”
• “Invalid handle.”
• “Scanning has
failed.”

•
•
•
•
•
•

Samsung Scan
Manager does not
work.

The numbers stored
in memory do not
dial correctly.

Make sure that the numbers are stored in
memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book
list. (See "Setting up a fax phonebook" on
page 66.)

The original does not
feed into the
machine.

•

There may be a copying or printing job in
progress. Try your job again when that job is
finished, try your job again.
The selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
The printer cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
The scanner driver is not installed or the
operating environment is not set up properly.
Ensure that the machine is properly
connected and the power is on, then restart
your computer.
The USB cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.

Faxes are not
received
automatically.

•
•
•

The receiving mode should be set to Fax.
Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
Check to see if the display shows any error
message. If it does, clear the problem.

The machine does
not send.

•

Make sure that the original is loaded in the
DADF or on the scanner glass.
Check the fax machine you are sending to,
to see if it can receive your fax.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Check your system requirements. Samsung
Scan Manager works in Window and
Macintosh (See "System requirements" on
page 26.)

Fax problems
CONDITION

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The machine is not
working, there is no
display and the
buttons are not
working.

•
•

No dial tone sounds.

•
•

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Check if the machine is printing received
data. If so, scan the document after the
received data has been printed.
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
Communication speed slows in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory
required to analyze and reproduce the
scanned image. Set your computer to the
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It
will help to increase the speed. For details
about how to set BIOS, refer to your
computer user’s guide.

Samsung Scan Manager Problem
CONDITION

CONDITION

•
•

•
The incoming fax has
blank spaces or is of
poor-quality.

•

Some of the words
on an incoming fax
are stretched.

The fax machine sending the fax had a
temporary document jam.

There are lines on
the originals you
sent.

Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.
(See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 95.)

The machine dials a
number, but the
connection with the
other fax machine
fails.

The other fax machine may be turned off, out
of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.
Speak with the other machine operator and
ask her/him to solve out the problem.

Faxes do not store in
memory.

There may not be enough memory space to
store the fax. If the display shows the low Fax
memory is full. Print or remove received fax
Job message, delete any faxes you no longer
need from the memory and then try to store the
fax again. Please call for service.

Blank areas appear
at the bottom of each
page or on other
pages, with a small
strip of text at the
top.

You may have chosen the wrong paper
settings in the user option setting. For details
about paper settings. (See "Setting the paper
size and type" on page 40.)

Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
Ensure that there is power being supplied to
the electrical outlet.

Check that the phone line is properly
connected.
Check that the phone socket on the wall is
working by plugging in another phone.

Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that
the original is the right size, not too thick or
thin.
Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.
The DADF rubber pad may need to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.

•
•
•

The fax machine sending you the fax may
be faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your machine by making a copy.
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace
the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 96.)

Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when
several printer languages are being used.

117 _Troubleshooting

To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript
errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired
selection next to the PostScript errors section.

PROBLEM
PostScript file
cannot be
printed.

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
The PostScript
driver may not be
installed correctly.

SOLUTION
•
•

•

Install the PostScript
driver, referring to
Software section.
Print a configuration page
and verify that the PS
version is available for
printing.
If the problem persists,
contact a service
representative.

“Limit Check
Error” message
appears.

The print job was
too complex.

You might need to reduce the
complexity of the page or
install more memory.

A PostScript
error page prints.

The print job may
not be PostScript.

Make sure that the print job is
a PostScript job. Check to
see whether the software
application expected a setup
or PostScript header file to be
sent to the machine.

The optional tray
is not selected in
the driver.

The printer driver
has not been
configured to
recognize the
optional tray.

Open the PostScript driver
properties, select the Device
Settings tab, and set the Tray
option of the Installable
Options section to Installed.

The machine
does not staple
correctly when
printing more
than one copy
from Acrobat
Reader with a
collate option.
(only in Window/
Macintosh)

It might take
longer to print
when you print a
PDF file as an
image.

Try to print with the latest
Adobe Reader program or
print with turning on "Print as
Image" option from Acrobat
printing options. It might take
longer to print when you print
a PDF file as an image.

The machine
does not staple
correctly when
printing more
than one copy
with a collate
option. (only in
Linux)

Turning off
collation options
on applications
(including CUPS
pstops collation
option) may solve
this problem.

If you want to use the
collation option, go to printer
driver’s advanced option and
turn the collation on.

Common Windows problems
CONDITION

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

“File in Use”
message appears
during installation.

Exit all software applications. Remove all
software from the StartUp Group, then restart
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.

“General Protection
Fault”, “Exception
OE”, “Spool32”, or
“Illegal Operation”
messages appear.

Close all other applications, reboot Windows
and try printing again.

“Fail To Print”, “A
printer timeout error
occurred.” messages
appear.

These messages may appear during printing.
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes
printing. If the message appears in standby
mode or after printing has been completed,
check the connection and/or whether an error
has occurred.

Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your
computer for further information on Windows error messages.

Troubleshooting_ 118

Common Linux problems
CONDITION
The machine does
not print.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
•

•

•

•

•

The machine does
not print whole pages
and its output is half
page printed.

119 _Troubleshooting

Check if the printer driver is installed in your
system. Open Unified Driver configurator
and switch to the Printers tab in Printers
configuration window to look at the list of
available printers. Make sure that your
machine is displayed on the list. If not, invoke
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
Check if the printer is started. Open Printers
configuration and select your machine on the
printers list. Look at the description in the
Selected printer pane. If its status contains
“(stopped)” string, press the Start button.
After that normal operation of the printer
should be restored. The “stopped” status
might be activated when some problems in
printing occurred. For instance, this could be
an attempt to print document when port is
claimed by a scanning application.
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only
one of them at a time is allowed to gain
control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”
response. You should open ports
configuration and select the port assigned to
your printer. In the Selected port pane you
can see if the port is occupied by some other
application. If this is the case, you should
wait for completion of the current job or
should press Release port button, if you are
sure that the present owner is not functioning
properly.
Check if your application has special print
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified
in the command line parameter then remove
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command
line parameter in the command item.
The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp
(Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the
socket printing instead of ipp or install later
version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).

It is a known problem that occurs when a color
printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to
bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug
688252.
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this
problem.

CONDITION

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

I cannot scan via
Gimp Front-end.

•

Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device
dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you
should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the
your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or
Gimp home page. For the detail information,
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or
Gimp Front-end application.
If you wish to use other kind of scan application,
refer to the Help for application.

I encounter error
“Cannot open port
device file” when
printing a document.

Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR
GUI, for example) while a print job is in
progress. Known versions of CUPS server
break the print job whenever print options are
changed and then try to restart the job from the
beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks port
while printing, the abrupt termination of the
driver keeps the port locked and therefore
unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this
situation occurred, try to release the port.

The machine does
not appear on the
scanners list.

•
•

•

Check if your machine is attached to your
computer. Make sure that it is connected
properly via the USB port and is turned on.
Check if the scanner driver for your machine
is installed in your system. Open Unified
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure
that driver with a name corresponding to
your machine's name is listed in the window.
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only
one of them at a time is allowed to gain
control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”
response. This can usually happen while
starting scan procedure, and appropriate
message box appears.
To identify the source of the problem, you
should open ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your scanner. port's symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is
occupied by some other application. If this is
the case, you should wait for completion of
the current job or should press Release port
button, if you are sure that the present port's
owner is not functioning properly.

CONDITION
The machine does
not scan.

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
•
•
•

Check if a document is loaded into the
machine.
Check if your machine is connected to the
computer. Make sure if it is connected properly
if I/O error is reported while scanning.
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one
of them at a time is allowed to gain control over
the device. The other “consumer” will
encounter “device busy” response. This can
usually happen while starting scan procedure,
and appropriate message box will be displayed.
To identify the source of the problem, you
should open ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is
occupied by some other application. If this is
the case, you should wait for completion of the
current job or should press Release port
button, if you are sure that the present port’s
owner is not functioning properly.

CONDITION

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The document has
printed, but the print job
has not disappeared
from the spooler in Mac
OS 10.3.2.

Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or
higher.

Some letters are not
displayed normally
during the Cover page
printing.

This problem is caused because Mac OS
cannot create the font during the Cover
page printing. English alphabet and
numbers are displayed normally at the
Cover page.

When printing a
document in Macintosh
with Acrobat Reader 6.0
or higher, colors print
incorrectly.

Make sure that the resolution setting in
your printer driver matches the one in
Acrobat Reader.

Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for
further information on Mac OS error messages.

Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further
information on Linux error messages.

Common Macintosh problems
CONDITION

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The printer does not
print PDF file correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.

Incompatibility between the PDF file and
the Acrobat products:
Printing the PDF file as an image may
solve this problem. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when
you print a PDF file as an image.

Troubleshooting_ 120

ordering supplies and accessories
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•

Supplies
Accessories

•

The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your
sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your
country.

How to purchase

ACCESSORY

DESCRIPTION

Optional tray 2/3/4

If you are experiencing
paper supply problems
frequently, you can
attach an additional 520
sheet tray. You can
print documents in
various sizes and types
of print materials.

SCX-S6555A

High capacity
feeder

If you are frequently
experiencing paper
supply problems, you
can attach an additional
2,100 sheet tray.

SCX-HCF100

Fax option kit

This kit lets you use
your machine as a fax
machine.

SCX-FAX210a
After installing
the kit, you have
to set up your
machine to
activate this
machine. (See
Page 125)

Stand

You can place the
machine on the
ergonomicallydesigned cabinet which
lets you reach the
machine conveniently.
Also, you can easily
move the cabinet with
its wheels, if necessary,
and store
miscellaneous items
like papers into the
cabinet.

•

Stacker & Stapler
(Finisher)

500 sheets

SCX-FIN10S

Staple Cartridge

3 x 5,000 staples per
package, covers
maximum thickness of
50 sheets, 1 staple
position.

SCX-STP000

SmarThru
WorkFlow

This feature lets you
send additional
information along with
the scanned document
to a specified network
location.

SCX-KIT11S

SUPPLIES
When the toner cartridge or imaging unit runs out, you can order the
following type of toner or imaging unit for your machine:
AVERAGE YIELDA

TYPE

PART NUMBER

Toner cartridge

Approx. 25,000

SCX-D6555A

Imaging unitb

Approx. 80,000

SCX-R6555A

a

a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
b. Declared yield value is based on a single side of A4- or letter-sized
paper.
Depending on the options and job mode, the imaging unit’s lifespan
may differ.
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must
be purchased in the same country where the machine was
purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be
incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges
and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.

ACCESSORIES
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s
performance and capacity.
ACCESSORY
Memory module

DESCRIPTION
Extends your
machine’s memory
capacity.

121 _Ordering supplies and accessories

PART NUMBER
ML-MEM160: 256 MB
This machine
comes with
256 MB DIMM.
To expand the
memory of your
machine, you
must remove the
existing DIMM
and purchase a
larger one.

PART NUMBER

•

Tall Stand: SCXDSK10T
Short Stand: SCXDSK10S
If you do not use
the optional tray
then Tall Stand is
recommended. In
case you add
three optional
trays, use Short
Stand.

ACCESSORY
FDI (Foreign
Device Interface)
kit

DESCRIPTION
This card is installed
inside the machine to
allow a third party
device such as a coin
operated device or a
card reader. Those
devices allow the payfor-print service on your
machine.

PART NUMBER
SCX-KIT20F

a. Countries which supports the serial telephone system are Germany,
Italia, France, Sweden, Denmark, Finland, Austria, Switzerland,
Belgium, Hungary.

HOW TO PURCHASE
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or visit
www.samsungprinter.com and select your country/region to obtain
information on calling for technical support.

Ordering supplies and accessories_ 122

installing accessories
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user
may have different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.
This chapter includes
•
•

Precautions to take when installing accessories
Installing a memory DIMM

•
•

PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING
ACCESSORIES
•

•

Disconnect the power cord
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external
accessories.
Discharge static electricity
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.

Replacing the Stapler
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit

4. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on
the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the
module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.

The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those
on an actual DIMM and its slot.
5. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a “click”.

INSTALLING A MEMORY DIMM
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this
DIMM slot to install additional memory.
Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be expanded to 512 MB.
The order information is provided for optional memory DIMM. (See "Memory
module" on page 121.)

Installing a memory module
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
2. Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.

Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be
damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,
carefully try the previous procedure again.

1 control board
cover
3. Take out a new memory DIMM from the plastic bag.

123 _Installing accessories

6. Replace the control board cover.

1. Open the finisher cover.

7. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.

2. Pull the stapler unit out.

Activating the added memory in the PS printer
properties
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.
1. Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see Software
section.
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound
> Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
4. Select the Samsung SCX-6545 Series PS printer.
5. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties.
6. Select Device Settings.
7. Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the
Installable Options section.
8. Click OK.

3. Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.

REPLACING THE STAPLER
When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the staple
cartridge appears on the display screen.
4. Unpack the new staple cartridge.
5. Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.

6. Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.

Installing accessories_ 124

7. Close the finisher cover.

ENABLING FAX FEATURE AFTER INSTALLING
THE FAX OPTION KIT
After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use
this function.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press Country.
Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will be
changed automatically for your country.

125 _Installing accessories

specifications
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.
This chapter includes;
•
•
•

General specifications
Printer specifications
Copier specifications

•
•

Scanner specifications
Facsimile specifications (optional)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Description

DADF

Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)

DADF document
size

•
•

Paper input
capacity

Tray 1: 500 multi-page for plain paper (80 g/m2)
Multi-purpose tray: 100 multi-page for plain paper
(80 g/m2)
• optional tray 2/3/4: 520 multi-page for plain paper
(80 g/m2)
• optional high capacity feeder: 2,100 multi-page
for plain paper (80 g/m2)
For details about paper input capacity, see
"Specification on print media" on page 35.

Width: 145 to 216 mm
Length: 145 to 356 mm

•
•

Paper output
capacity

•
•

Consumables

2-piece toner cartridge and imaging unit system

Power rating

110 - 127 VAC, or 220 - 240 VAC
See the Rating label on the machine for the correct
voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for
your machine.

Face down: 500 sheets 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Optional stacker: 500 sheets 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond)

Power
consumption

•
•
•

Average operation mode: Less than 750 W
Power save mode: Less than 30 W
Stand by mode: Less than 120 W

Noise levela

•
•
•

Standby mode: Less than 37 dBA
Printing mode: Less than 55 dBA
Copying mode: Less than 57 dBA

Boot-up time

Less than 25 seconds (from sleep mode)
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a
lot in the HDD

Operating
environment

Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH

Display

wVGA (800 x 480 x RGB) color

Toner cartridge
yieldb

Average Cartridge Yield 25,000 standard pages.
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC
19752.

Item

Description

Imaging unit
yieldc

Approx. 80,000 pages

Memory

256 MB (max. 512 MB)

External
dimension
(W x D x H)

641 x 494 x 607 mm (25.2 x 19.4 x 23.9 inches)
without optional trays

Weight

48.2 Kg (including consumables)

Package weight

Paper: 5.4 Kg, Plastic: 1.2 Kg

Duty cycle

Monthly print volume: Up to 200,000 pages

a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779
b. Average cartridge yield declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
The number of pages may be affected by the operating environment,
printing interval, media type, and media size.
c. May be affected by operating environment, optional, printing interval,
media type and media size.

PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Description

Printing method

Laser Beam Printing

Printing speeda

Up to 43 ppm in A4 (45 ppm in Letter)

Duplex printing
speed

Up to 38 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in Letter)

First print out
time

8 seconds (from ready)

Print resolution

Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi Effective output

Printer language

PCL 6, PS 3, PDF Direct V1.4, TIFF, JPEG

OS compatibilityb

•
•

Interface

PCL Driver: 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/Server
2008 R2
PS Driver: 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/Server
2008 R2, Various Linux OS,
Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6

High Speed USB 2.0
High Speed USB 2.0 HOST
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX

Specifications_ 126

a. Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing
performance, application software, connect on method, media type,
media size, and job complexity.
b. Please visit www.samsungprinter.com to download the latest software
version.

COPIER SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Item

Description

Color bit depth

•
•

Mono bit depth

1 bit for Linearity & Halftone
8 bits (External), 12 bits (Internal) for Gray scale

Grayscale

256 levels

Description

Copy speeda

Up to 43 cpm in A4 (45 cpm in Letter)

Duplex copy
speed

•
•

Simplex to Duplex (1-2): Up to 38 cpm in A4
(40 cpm in Letter)
Duplex to Duplex (2-2): Up to 28 cpm in A4
(30 cpm in Letter)

First copy out
time

•
•

Scanner glass: Less than 5 seconds
DADF: Less than 8 seconds

Copy resolution

•
•

a. Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might
differ.
b. JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in Color Mode.

FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL)
Item

Description

Compatibility

ITU-T G3, Super G3

Scan:up to 600 x 300 (text, text/photo),
up to 600 x 600 (photo)
Print:up to 600 x 600 (text, text/photo),
up to 600 x 600 (photo)

Applicable line

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or
behind PABX

Data coding

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)

Scanner glass: 25 to 400%
DADF: 25 to 200%

Modem speed

33.6 Kbps

Transmission
speed

Up to 3 seconds/pagea

Maximum
document length

•
•

Scanner glass: 356 mm (14 inches)
Duplex automatic document glass: 356 mm
(14 inches)

Resolution

•

Standard: 203 x 98 dpi (mono), 200 x 200 dpi
(color)
Fine: 203 x 196 dpi (mono), 200 x 200 dpi (color)
Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi (mono), 200 x 200 dpi
(color)

Zoom rate

•
•

Multiple copies

1 to 999 pages

a. Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.

SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Description

Compatibility

TWAIN standard / WIA standard

Scanning method

DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD (Charge Coupled
Device) module

Resolutiona

TWAIN standard: 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (Up to 4,800 x
4,800 dpi by software enhancement)
WIA standard: Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Scan to USB, Scan to PC: 100, 200, 300 dpi
Scan to E-mail, Scan to Server: 100, 200, 300, 400,
600 dpi

Network Scan File
format

PDF, TIFF, JPEGb

Effective
scanning length

•
•

Effective
scanning width

Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)

127 _Specifications

Internal: 36 bits
External: 24 bits

Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7 inches)
DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)

•
•
Memory

Max 2 GB (uses HDD)

Halftone

256 levels

Auto dialer

up to 200 numbers

a. Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C"
by ITU-T No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.

glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well
as mentioned in this user's guide.

ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can
scan some amount of the paper at once.

DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the
machine can scan on both sides of the paper.

Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box
state, reset, or initialized.

AppleTalk

DHCP

AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and
white.

DIMM

BMP

The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,
such as the Internet.

A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file
format on that platform.

BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to
prevent any damage when you move the machine.

Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing
additional copies.

Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of
the machine.

Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.

CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.

Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,
received fax data.

DNS

Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.

DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.

DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers.

Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.

Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer
limits 2,400 pages a day.

ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes
caused by telephone line noise.

Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as
another.

Glossary_ 128

An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

Ethernet

Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of
an organization's information or operations with its employees.
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal
website.

Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in
use during the 1990s to the present.

IP address

EtherTalk

The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer
can complete within one minute.

A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.

FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol
(such as the Internet or an intranet).

Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm
when it comes out of a laser printer.

Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a
network that allows access to another computer or network.

Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented
by various shades of gray.

Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.

HDD
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement
of technology related to electricity.

IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to
the peripheral (for example, a printer).

129 _Glossary

An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing
the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM

IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution
than older ones.

IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).

ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.

ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.

ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.

JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be
used on other images.

JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.

LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/
IP.

LED

PABX

LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates
the status of a machine.

A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.

MAC address

Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page
printers.

Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface
Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to
locate machines on large networks.

MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.

MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebookbased run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress
white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.

MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method
recommended by ITU-T T.6.

Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted
information.

MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.

NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.

OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is
usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.
An exposing unit of a imaging is slowly worn away by its usage of the
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches
from grits of a paper.

PCL

PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a
device independent and resolution independent format.

PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer
to the printer.

Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can
be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.

PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can
produce in one minute.

PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies
many tasks.

Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.

PS
See PostScript.

PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.

Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.

Originals

SMB

The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.

Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Interprocess communication mechanism.

OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, textbased protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.

Glossary_ 130

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to
determine which part of the address is the network address and which
part is the host address.

TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.

TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after
failed transmissions.

TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been
made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner
is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text
and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.

TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAINcompliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be
initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a
UNC path is: \\\\

URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.

USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,
currency, and other government documents to discourage
counterfeiting.

WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant
scanner.

131 _Glossary

index
A

D

ADF, load 33

DADF
cover 18
input tray 18
output tray 18
width guides 18

adjustment
altitude 29

admin setting 83
altitude adjustment 85

copying 44
faxing 65
scanning 58, 75

authentication

default settings 30
altitude adjustment 85
changing the default settings 30
energy saver 84
language 84
loading paper 30
machine test 85
measurements 84
output option 85
setting a fax header 62
sound 85
supplies management 85
system timeout 84
tray management 85
tray setting 30

Book copy 47

C
checking stored document 94
cleaning

changing the receive mode 64
extension telephone 65
in answering machine/fax 64
in memory 65
secure receiving 65

fax sending
automatic resending 63
delay sending 63
duplex sending 62
redialing the last number 63
sending a fax 62
sending a fax manually 63
sending a priority fax 64
setting a fax header 62

fax setup 86
faxing
color mode 66
darkness 65
enabling the fax kit option 92, 125
erasing background 65
original type 65
phonebook 66
printing a fax report 94
resolution 65
solving faxing problems 117

installation 27

duplex
copying 43
faxing 65
scanning 57, 74

color mode
faxing 66
scanning 58, 74

FDI (Foreign Interface Device)

control panel 18, 19

E

copy

email address

copy setup 86

fax receiving

driver

Clone copy 46

copying 42
covers 47
duplex copy 43
erasing background 48
erasing edge 48
making a booklet 47
poster 46
reduce/enlarge 43
shifting margin 48
solving copy problems 116
text/photo 44
the size of the originals 42
time & date 86
transparencies 47

enabling option feature after installing
the kit 125
ordering 121

printing date&time in copied out 84, 86

B

collated 44

fax option kit

date & time 29, 84

auto center 48

inside 95
outside 95
scan unit 95
transfer unit 95

F

darkness

answering machine/fax 64
network accounting 89
printing a report 84, 93
setting up 29, 84

extension telephone 65

ordering 122
entering email addresses to input field
54
Global 54
Group 54
Individual 54
storing 54

finisher (Stacker & Stapler)
ordering 121
paper jam 107

front cover 18
FTP 56

energy saver 29

G

erasing background

general settings 84

copying 48
faxing 65
scanning 58, 75

erasing punch hole 48

Gray scan 58, 74
Group
Group fax number 66

error correction mode 86
error message 108
132

I

Mailbox
creating Mailbox 68
deleting the data of the Mailbox 69
Mailbox List 68
Mailbox No. 68
Mailbox Passcode 68
polling 68
printing a Mailbox 69
sending to remote Mailbox 69
storing the originals 68

ID copy 45
imaging unit 18
imaging unit reorder notification 94
Individual
email addresses for scanning 54
individual fax number 66

Maintenance

J

imaging unit 97
maintenance parts 99
toner cartridge 95, 97

jam
clearing paper from the duplex unit area
107
clearing paper from the exit area 106
clearing paper from the fuser unit 106
clearing paper from the multi-purpose
tray 106
clearing paper from the optional tray
103, 104
clearing paper from the stacker
(finisher) 107
clearing paper from the toner cartridge
106
clearing paper from the tray1 102
clearing the original from scanner glass
101
tips for avoiding paper jams 100

memory DIMM
installing 123

memory module
installing 123
ordering 121

message on the display screen 108
Mono 58, 75
multi-purpose tray 18

N
setting up 25, 87

notification
receiving a fax in Mailbox 68

N-up copy 46

K
O
OCR 59, 75

L

On Hook Dial

language 29
Interrupt 21
Power Saver 20
Status 21

Linux problems 119
loading originals
ADF 33
scanner glass 33

M

optional tray 18, 121
original size
copying 42
scanning 57, 74

original type
copying 44
faxing 65
scanning 58, 74

originals

Machine Info 83
Machine Setup 83
machine status 83

133

sending a fax 63

optional service 91, 92

LED

changing the size 37
clearing jam 102
loading in the multi-purpose tray 39
loading in the optional tray 38
loading in the tray1 38
paper feeding problems 111

paper type
setting 40

phonebook
fax 66
fax phonebook from SyncThru Web
Service 67

polling
deleting the polling document 67
polling a remote fax 67
polling from remote Mailbox 68
printing the polling document 67
storing the originals for polling 67

PostScript
problems 117

Power Saver 20

network

JPEG 59, 75

keyboard 31

paper

Power Save 29

jam, clear
document 100

P

jam, clear 100
loading 33

output options 85

hardware 20
using power save mode 29, 84

print quality problems, solve 114
print/report
accounting reports 93
configuration report 93
e-mail confirmation report 93
fax report 93
network auth. log report 93
network configuration 93
PCL font list 93
PS3 font list 93
scan report 94
scan to server confirmation 93
Schedule jobs report 93
supplies information 93
usage page report 93

printing
problem solving 112
USB memory 76

problem, solve
Linux 119
printing quality 114

problems

scanning

copying 116
display message 108
faxing 117
paper feeder 111
PostScript 117
printing 112
scanning 116
touch screen 111
Windows 118

color mode 58, 74
darkness 58, 75
enabling the scan kit option 92
erasing background 58, 75
file format 59, 75
original size 57, 74
original type 58, 74
printing an email report 94
quality 58, 75
resolution 57, 74
scan preset 59
sending it via email 52
sending it via FTP 56
sending it via SMB 56
solving scanning problems 116
USB flash memory 73, 78

Q
quality
scanning 58, 75

R

serial number 94

remote code 86

service center registration 84

replacing components

service contact numbers 135

imaging unit 97
toner cartridge 96

shifting margin 48

scan preset 59

speed dial no. 66

Scan to Email 52

Stacker 121

confirmation 93

loading documents 33

problem solving 111

tray
adjusting the width and length 37
optional tray 18
tray1 18

U
USB flash memory
printing 76
scanning 73, 78

using

W
Windows
problems 118

stand 18, 121
staple cartridge
ordering 121
replacing 124

scanned file format 59, 75
scanner glass

touch screen

SMB 56
sound 85

Scan to Server 56

toner reorder notification 94

side cover 18

S

confirmation 93

toner cartridge 18

SetIP 30
linux 31
macintosh 31
windows 30

Report 93
faxing 65
scanning 57

TIFF 59, 75

SetIP

replacing stapler 124
Resolution

terminal ID 86

stored documents 94
supplies
browsing the supplies life 83
checking the supplies life 94
expected imaging unit life 85, 97
expected toner cartridge life 85
management 85

scanner lid 18
Scanner lock switch 18

Supplies Management 85
SyncThru Web Service
email address 52
fax settings 67
SMB/FTP setting 56

System timeout 29

T
telephone 64
134

contact samsung worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.
COUNTRY/REG
ION

CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER

WEB SITE

ARGENTINE

0800-333-3733

www.samsung.com/ar

AUSTRALIA

1300 362 603

www.samsung.com/au

AUSTRIA

0810-SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min)

www.samsung.com/at

BELARUS

810-800-500-55-500

www.samsung/ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru

BELGIUM

02 201 2418

www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr
(French)

BRAZIL

0800-124-421
4004-0000

www.samsung.com/br

CANADA

1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/ca

CHILE

800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)

www.samsung.com/cl

CHINA

400-810-5858
010-6475 1880

www.samsung.com/cn

COLOMBIA

01-8000112112

www.samsung.com.co

COSTA RICA

0-800-507-7267

www.samsung.com/latin

CZECH
REPUBLIC

800-SAMSUNG
(800-726786)

www.samsung.com/cz

Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DENMARK

8-SAMSUNG (7267864)

www.samsung.com/dk

ECUADOR

1-800-10-7267

www.samsung.com/latin

EL SALVADOR

800-6225

www.samsung.com/latin

ESTONIA

800-7267

www.samsung.com/ee

KAZAKHSTAN

8-10-800-500-55-500

www.samsung.com/kz_ru

KYRGYZSTAN

00-800-500-55-500

FINLAND

30-6227 515

www.samsung.com/fi

FRANCE

01 4863 0000

www.samsung.com/fr

GERMANY

01805 - SAMSUNG
(726-7864 € 0,14/min)

www.samsung.de

GUATEMALA

1-800-299-0013

www.samsung.com/latin

HONDURAS

800-7919267

www.samsung.com/latin

HONG KONG

3698-4698

www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/

COUNTRY/REG
ION

CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER

WEB SITE

HUNGARY

06-80-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/hu

INDIA

3030 8282
1800 110011
1800 3000 8282

www.samsung.com/in

INDONESIA

0800-112-8888

www.samsung.com/id

ITALIA

800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)

www.samsung.com/it

JAMAICA

1-800-234-7267

www.samsung.com/latin

JAPAN

0120-327-527

www.samsung.com/jp

LATVIA

8000-7267

www.samsung.com/lv

LITHUANIA

8-800-77777

www.samsung.com/lt

LUXEMBURG

02 261 03 710

www.samsung.com/lu

MALAYSIA

1800-88-9999

www.samsung.com/my

MEXICO

01-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/mx

MOLDOVA

00-800-500-55-500

www.samsung/ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru

NETHERLANDS

0900-SAMSUNG
(0900-7267864) (€
0,10/min)

www.samsung.com/nl

NEW ZEALAND

0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726
786)

www.samsung.com/nz

NICARAGUA

00-1800-5077267

www.samsung.com/latin

NORWAY

3-SAMSUNG (7267864)

www.samsung.com/no

PANAMA

800-7267

www.samsung.com/latin

PHILIPPINES

1800-10-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-3-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-8-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
02-5805777

www.samsung.com/ph

POLAND

0 801 1SAMSUNG
(172678)
022-607-93-33

www.samsung.com/pl

PORTUGAL

80820-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/pt

PUERTO RICO

1-800-682-3180

www.samsung.com/latin

REP. DOMINICA

1-800-751-2676

www.samsung.com/latin

EIRE

0818 717 100

www.samsung.com/ie

135 _Contact SAMSUNG worldwide

COUNTRY/REG
ION

CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER

WEB SITE

RUSSIA

8-800-555-55-55

www.samsung.ru

SINGAPORE

1800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/sg

SLOVAKIA

0800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/sk

SOUTH AFRICA

0860 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/za

SPAIN

902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172
678)

www.samsung.com/es

SWEDEN

0771 726 7864
(SAMSUNG)

www.samsung.com/se

SWITZERLAND

0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)

www.samsung.com/ch

TADJIKISTAN

8-10-800-500-55-500

TAIWAN

0800-329-999

www.samsung.com/tw

THAILAND

1800-29-3232
02-689-3232

www.samsung.com/th

TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO

1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/latin

TURKEY

444 77 11

www.samsung.com/tr

U.A.E

800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8000-4726

www.samsung.com/ae

U.K

0845 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)

www.samsung.com/uk

U.S.A

1-800-SAMSUNG
(7267864)

www.samsung.com/us

UKRAINE

8-800-502-0000

www.samsung/ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru

UZBEKISTAN

8-10-800-500-55-500

www.samsung.com/kz_ru

VENEZUELA

0-800-100-5303

www.samsung.com/latin

VIETNAM

1 800 588 889

www.samsung.com/vn

Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 136

© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.
TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.

REV 4.02

Samsung Printer

Software section

Software section

Contents
1. Installing Printer Software in Windows
Installing Printer Software ................................................................................................................................................ 5
Installing Software for Local Printing .................................................................................................................... 5
Installing Software for Network Printing ................................................................................................................ 8
Reinstalling Printer Software .......................................................................................................................................... 11
Removing Printer Software ............................................................................................................................................ 12

2. Basic Printing
Printing a Document ....................................................................................................................................................... 13
Printing to a file (PRN) ................................................................................................................................................... 14
Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................................................... 14
Basic Tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 15
Paper Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 15
Graphics Tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 16
Advanced Tab .................................................................................................................................................... 17
Samsung Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 17
Using a Favorite Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 17
Using Help .......................................................................................................................................................... 18

3. Advanced Printing
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing) .................................................................................... 19
Printing Posters .............................................................................................................................................................. 20
Printing Booklets ........................................................................................................................................................... 20
Printing on Both Sides of Paper ..................................................................................................................................... 21
Change percentage of your document ........................................................................................................................... 21
Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 21

1

Using Watermarks .......................................................................................................................................................... 22
Using an Existing Watermark ............................................................................................................................. 22
Creating a Watermark ........................................................................................................................................ 22
Editing a Watermark ........................................................................................................................................... 22
Deleting a Watermark ......................................................................................................................................... 22
Using Overlays ............................................................................................................................................................... 23
What is an Overlay? ........................................................................................................................................... 23
Creating a New Page Overlay ............................................................................................................................ 23
Using a Page Overlay ......................................................................................................................................... 23
Deleting a Page Overlay ..................................................................................................................................... 23

4. Using Windows PostScript Driver
Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................................................... 24
Layout tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 24
Paper/Quality tab ................................................................................................................................................ 25
Using Help .......................................................................................................................................................... 25

5. Using Direct Printing Utility
Overview Direct Printing Utility ....................................................................................................................................... 26
Printing ........................................................................................................................................................................... 26
From the Direct Printing Utility window ............................................................................................................... 26
Using the shortcut icon ....................................................................................................................................... 26
Using the right-click menu .................................................................................................................................. 26

6. Sharing the Printer Locally
Setting Up a Host Computer .......................................................................................................................................... 27
Setting Up a Client Computer ......................................................................................................................................... 27

7. Scanning
Scanning Using SmarThru Office ................................................................................................................................... 28
Starting SmarThru Office .................................................................................................................................... 28
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................................................................................... 28
Using SmarThru Office ....................................................................................................................................... 28
Uninstalling SmarThru Office .............................................................................................................................. 29
2

Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software ......................................................................................................... 30
Scanning Using the WIA Driver ...................................................................................................................................... 30
Windows XP/Server 2003 ................................................................................................................................... 30
Windows Vista .................................................................................................................................................... 30
Windows 7 .......................................................................................................................................................... 30

8. Using Smart Panel
Understanding Smart Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 31
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide .............................................................................................................................. 32
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings ................................................................................................................ 32

9. Using Your Printer in Linux
Getting Started ............................................................................................................................................................... 33
Installing the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................................................................... 33
Installing the Unified Linux Driver ....................................................................................................................... 33
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................................................... 34
Using the Unified Driver Configurator ............................................................................................................................. 35
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator ............................................................................................................ 35
Printers Configuration ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Scanners Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 36
Ports Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 36
Configuring Printer Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 37
Printing a Document ....................................................................................................................................................... 37
Printing from Applications ................................................................................................................................... 37
Printing Files ....................................................................................................................................................... 38
Scanning a Document .................................................................................................................................................... 38
Using the Image Manager .................................................................................................................................. 39

10. Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Installing Software .......................................................................................................................................................... 41
Installing the printer software .............................................................................................................................. 41
Uninstalling the printer software ......................................................................................................................... 41
Setting Up the Printer ..................................................................................................................................................... 42
For a Network-connected ................................................................................................................................... 42
For a USB-connected ......................................................................................................................................... 43
3

Printing ........................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Printing a Document ........................................................................................................................................... 44
Changing Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................... 44
Printer Features .................................................................................................................................................. 46
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper ................................................................................................. 47
Printing on both sides of paper ........................................................................................................................... 47
Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................................ 48
Scanning with USB ............................................................................................................................................. 48
Scanning with network ........................................................................................................................................ 48

4

1

Typical Installation

Installing Printer Software in
Windows
This chapter includes:
•

Installing Printer Software

•

Reinstalling Printer Software

•

Removing Printer Software

This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for
printer operations will be installed.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and
powered on.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive and click OK.

NOTE: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for other
operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows user's guide or
online help.

If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008
R2, click Start → All programs → Accessories → Run, and type
X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control
window.

Installing Printer Software
You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing.
To install the printer software on the computer, perform the appropriate
installation procedure depending on the printer in use.

3

Click Next.

A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with
your printer. The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the
operating system you are using.
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning
installation.

Installing Software for Local Printing
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the
printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB or parallel cable.
If your printer is attached to a network, skip this step and go to “Installing
Software for Network Printing” on page 8.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4

Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click Next.

NOTE: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the
installation procedure, click
in the upper right corner of the box to
close the window, or click Cancel.

5
Installing Printer Software in Windows

NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the
following window will appear.

NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t work
properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling Printer Software”
on page 11.

Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and
powered on.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive and click OK.

• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click Next, and No
on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page
will not be printed at the end of the installation.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s Guide may
differ depending on the printer and interface in use.

5

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the
checkbox and click Next.

If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008
R2, click Start → All programs → Accessories → Run, and type
X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control
window.

3

Click Next.

Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.

6

If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.

7

To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to
receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and click
Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.
Otherwise, just click Finish.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

6
Installing Printer Software in Windows

4

Select Custom installation. Click Next.

• The installation window that appears in this User’s Guide may
differ depending on the printer and interface in use.

6

5

Select the components to be installed and click Next.

Select your printer and click Next.

NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by clicking
[Browse].

7

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the
checkbox and click Next.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.

8

If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.

9
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the
following window will appear.

To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to
receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and click
Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.
Otherwise, just click Finish.

• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click Next, and No
on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page
will not be printed at the end of the installation.

7
Installing Printer Software in Windows

Installing Software for Network Printing

4

Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click Next.

5

The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the
printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.

When you connect your printer to a network, you must first configure the
TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have assigned and verified the
TCP/IP settings, you are ready to install the software on each computer
on the network.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method.

Typical Installation
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for
printer operations will be installed.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and
powered on. For details about connecting to the network, see the
supplied printer’s User’s Guide.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008
R2, click Start → All programs → Accessories → Run, and type
X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control
window.

3

Click Next.
•If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh
the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the
network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name
and the IP address for the printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page.
•To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared
Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a
shared printer by clicking the Browse button.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the
firewall and click Update.
For Windows operating system, click Start → Control Panel and start
windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For other operating
system, refer to its on-line guide.

8
Installing Printer Software in Windows

6

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to
print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung
Printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so
desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.

3

Click Next.

Otherwise, just click Finish.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4

Select Custom installation. Click Next.

5

The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the
printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.

NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t work
properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling Printer Software”
on page 11.

Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install and set a specific IP
address.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and
powered on. For details about connecting to the network, see the
supplied printer’s User’s Guide.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008
R2, click Start → All programs → Accessories → Run, and type
X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control
window.

•If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh
the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the
network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name
and the IP address for the printer.

9
Installing Printer Software in Windows

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page.
•To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared
Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a
shared printer by clicking the Browse button.

NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by clicking
[Browse].

7

NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the
firewall and click Update.
For Windows operating system, click Start → Control Panel and start
windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For other operating
system, refer to its on-line guide.

Select the components to be installed. After selecting the
components, the following window appears. You can also change
the printer name, set the printer to be shared on the network, set
the printer as the default printer, and change the port name of each
printer. Click Next.

TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific network
printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP Address window
appears. Do as follows:

To install this software on a server, select the Setting up this
printer on a server checkbox.

8

a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list.
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the printer
manually and click Configure to set the specific IP address for the
network printer.

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to
print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung
Printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so
desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.
Otherwise, just click Finish.

• Click Next.

6

Select the components to be installed and click Next.

NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t work
properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling Printer Software”
on page 11.

10
Installing Printer Software in Windows

Reinstalling Printer Software

NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the
following window will appear.

You can reinstall the software if installation fails.

1
2

Start Windows.

3
4

Select Repair and click Next.

From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs → your
printer driver name → Maintenance.

The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the
printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.

• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click Next, and No
on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page
will not be printed at the end of the installation.
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s Guide may
differ depending on the printer and interface in use.

5

If you installed the printer software for local printing and you

•If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh
the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the
network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name
and the IP address for the printer.
•To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared
Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a
shared printer by clicking the Browse button.

Select the components you want to reinstall and click Next.
select your printer driver name, the window asking you to print a
test page appears. Do as follows:
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click Next.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.

6

When the reinstallation is done, click Finish.

You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any item
individually.

11
Installing Printer Software in Windows

Removing Printer Software
1
2

Start Windows.

3

Select Remove and click Next.

From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs → your
printer driver name → Maintenance.

You will see a component list so that you can remove any item
individually.

4
5

Select the components you want to remove and then click Next.
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click Yes.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from
your computer.

6

After the software is removed, click Finish.

12
Installing Printer Software in Windows

2

1
2

Basic Printing

Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is displayed. It
may look slightly different depending on your application.
The basic print settings are selected within the Print window. These
settings include the number of copies and print range.

This chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in
Windows.
This chapter includes:
•

Printing a Document

•

Printing to a file (PRN)

•

Printer Settings
- Basic Tab

Make sure that your
printer is selected.

- Paper Tab
- Graphics Tab
- Advanced Tab
- Samsung Tab
- Using a Favorite Setting
- Using Help

3

Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print
range are selected within the Print window.

Printing a Document

To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer
driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print
window. For details, see “Printer Settings” on page 14.

NOTES:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer in use. However the
composition of the printer properties window is similar.
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your
printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the
supplied CD-ROM.
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see an
exclamationmark

or

mark. An exclamation mark means you

can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and
mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s
setting or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing
from various Windows applications. The exact steps for printing a
document may vary depending on the application program you are
using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your software application for the
exact printing procedure.

13
Basic Printing

4

To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.

NOTE: If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the AnyWeb Print
too will save your time for screen-captured images or printing the
image. Click Start > All programs > your printer driver name >
AnyWeb Print to link the website where the tool is available for the
download.

Printing to a file (PRN)

Printer Settings

You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose.

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access
all of the printer options you need when using your printer. When the
printer properties are displayed, you can review and change the settings
needed for your print job.

To create a file:

1

Check the Print to file box at the Print window.

Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your operating
system. This Software User’s Guide shows the Properties window for
Windows XP.
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User’s Guide
may differ depending on the printer in use.
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you can view
additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your Windows User’s Guide).

NOTES:

2

Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then click OK.

14
Basic Printing

• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the
printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software
application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer
driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the
current program. To make your changes permanent, make them in
the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows OS,
refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.

Basic Tab
Use Basic tab to adjust how the document appear on the printed page.
Click the Basic tab to display the options shown below.

• Poster Printing: This option allows you to print your document
into a poster-size document. This option prints your document into
several pages. Paste printed pages together to form one postersize document. (See “Printing Posters” on page 20)
• Booklet Printing: This option allows you to print your document
on both sides of the paper to make into a booklet. (See “Printing
Booklets” on page 20.)

Double-Sided Printing
This option allows you to print on both sides of paper. (See “Printing
on Both Sides of Paper” on page 21.)

Paper Tab
Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Click the Paper tab to display the options shown below.

Orientation
This option allows you to select the direction in which information is
printed on a page.
• Portrait: This option prints across the width of the page, letter
style.
• Landscape: This option prints across the length of the page,
spreadsheet style.
• Rotate 180 Degrees: This option allows you to rotate the page,
180 degrees.

Copies
▲ Portrait

This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.
You can select 1 to 999 copies.

▲ Landscape

Paper Options

Quality
The available Quality options may vary depending on your
machine. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed
characters and graphics. The higher setting may also increase the
printing time of a document.

Layout Options
This option allows you to select various ways to layout your
document.
• Single Page Per Side: This option is a basic layout option. This
option allows you to print a page on one side of a paper.
• Multiple Pages Per Side: This option allows you to print several
pages on one side of a paper. (See “Printing Multiple Pages on
One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)” on page 19.)

15
Basic Printing

This option allows you to choose paper tray you want to use.

NOTE: When printing on an envelope, select the Envelope tab to set
the options.
• Size: This option allows you to set the size of paper to be loaded
in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it.
• Source: Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper
tray. Use MP Tray when printing on special materials, such as
envelopes and transparencies.
• Type: This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded
in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it.
This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired
print quality may not be achieved.

- Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your machine is
monochrome and printing on the 60 g./m2 (16 lb) cotton paper.
- Thick: 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb) thick paper.
- Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper.
- Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper such as Gilbert
25 % and Gilbert 100 %.
- Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.
- Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted paper.
- Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper.
- Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope.
- Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) transparency
paper.
- Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) label.
- CardStock: 90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock.
- Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond.
- Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the
print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this
option.
• Advanced: This option allows you to print the first page using a
different paper type from the rest of the document by choosing the
tray to use for printing the first page. For example, if you want to
print the first page using color paper, load color paper into the MP
Tray, and plain paper into Tray 1. Then, select Tray 1. in the
Source option and MP Tray in this Advanced option.

Graphics Tab
Use the Graphics tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific
printing needs.
Click the Graphics tab to display the options shown below.

Font/Text
NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option returns to
the default setting.

Check All Text Black box to print all the texts in your document in
solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.

Advanced
Scaling Options
This option allows you to automatically or manually scale your print
job on a page. This option can be grayed out according to the
Layout Options setting in the Basic tab.
• Fit to Page: This option allows you to scale your print job to any
selected paper size regardless of the document size. (See “Fitting
Your Document to a Selected Paper Size” on page 21.)
• Percentage: This option allows you to change the size of a page’s
contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing
in a percentage you want. (See “Change percentage of your
document” on page 21.)

16
Basic Printing

• Download as Outline: This option allows the driver to download
any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not stored
(resident) on your machine. If, after printing a document, you find
that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as Bit
Image and resubmit your print job. This feature is available only
when you use the PCL printer driver.
• Download as Bit Image: This option allows the driver to
download the font data as bitmap images. Documents with
complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other
fonts, will print faster in this setting. Download as Bit Image is
useful when printing from Adobe programs.
• Print as Graphics: This option allows the driver to download any
fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic
content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance
(speed) may be enhanced in this setting.
• Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident fonts)
to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in
your document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting
this option can speed up your printing time. When using Printer
fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document
to those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your
document that are very different from those resident in the printer,
your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like
on the screen.

NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option returns to
the default setting.

Toner Save
This option allows you to extend the life of your toner cartridge and
reduces the cost per page without a significant reduction in print
quality.
• On: This option to allows the printer to use less toner on each
page.
• Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document,
select this option.

• Print Even Pages: This option allows you to print only the even
numbered pages of the document.
• Advanced: This option allows you to set advanced output options
for printing, such as printing an information page, and saving as a
form to later use as an overlay.
• Staple: Do the stapling on the printouts.
• Request Offset: If you want the printouts to be sorted the same
way as the original, the machine places printout sets slightly offset
from one another.

NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option returns to
the default setting.

Job Settings

Advanced Tab

This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file
by using the HDD.
• Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is for
printing without saving the printing file in the HDD.
• User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.
• Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.

Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options.
Click the Advanced tab to display the options shown below.

Samsung Tab
Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number
of the driver. If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can have
access to following services:
Click the Samsung tab to display the options.

Help
This option allows you to open the Help file by searching a keyword.

Service

Watermark
This option allows you to print text over an existing document. (See
“Using Watermarks” on page 22.)

• Buy Supplies: This option allows you to order supplies on-line.
• Samsung Website: This option directly connects you to
Samsung Website.
• Registration: This option allows you to register your machine.
• Check for updates: This option allows you to download updates
for your printer driver.

Using a Favorite Setting

Overlay
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. (See
“Using Overlays” on page 23.)

Output options
This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages will
print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.
• Normal: This option allows you to print all pages from the first
page to the last page.
• Reverse All Pages: This option allows you to print all pages from
the last page to the first page.
• Print Odd Pages: This option allows you to print only the odd
numbered pages of the document.

17
Basic Printing

The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for
future use.
To save a Presets item:

1

Change the settings as needed on each tab.

2

Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.

3

Click Save. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are
saved.

To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The
machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected.
To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and
click Delete.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting
Printer Default from the Presets drop down list.

Using Help
Click
from the upper-right corner of the window, and then click on any
option. The help screen gives detailed information about the printing
features provided by the printer driver.

18
Basic Printing

3

Advanced Printing

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
of Paper (N-Up Printing)

This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks.

NOTE:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer in use. However the
composition of the printer properties window is similar.

1

2

3

4

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the
supplied CD-ROM.

You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper.
To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size
and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on
one sheet.

1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2

From the Basic tab, choose Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type
drop-down list.

3

Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet
(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list.

4

Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if
necessary.

This chapter includes:
•

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)

•

Printing Posters

•

Printing Booklets

•

Printing on Both Sides of Paper

•

Change percentage of your document

•

Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size

•

Using Watermarks

•

Using Overlays

Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on
the sheet.

5
6

19
Advanced Printing

Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
Click OK and print the document.

Printing Posters

Printing Booklets

This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16
sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form
one poster-size document.

1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2

Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down
list.

3

Configure the poster option:
You can select the page layout from Poster<2x2>, Poster<3x3>,
or Poster<4x4>. If you select Poster<2x2>, the output will be
automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages.

Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier to
pasting the sheets together.
0.15 inches

8

9

8

9

This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of
the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half
after printing to produce a booklet.

NOTE: If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter,
Legal, A4, Us Folio, or Oficio sized print media.

1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
the printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2

From the Basic tab, choose Booklet Printing from the Type dropdown list.

3

Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.

NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes.
In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the
available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically
canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without
or
mark).

0.15 inches

4
5

Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the poster by
pasting the sheets together.

20
Advanced Printing

4
5

Click OK and print the document.
After printing, fold and staple the pages.

Printing on Both Sides of Paper

Change percentage of your document

You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide
how you want your document oriented. You can only use this feature with
Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper.

You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or smaller
on the printed page.

The options are:
• Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the
printer.
• None
• Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in book
binding.
• Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.

1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2
3

From the Paper tab.
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.

4
5

Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
Click OK and print the document.

2

2

3

3
2

5

5

Fitting Your Document to a Selected
Paper Size

5

2

3
3
5

▲ Long Edge

▲ Short Edge

• Reverse Duble-Sided Printing, allows you to select general
print order compare to duplex print order.

A

NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes,

This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected
paper size regardless of the digital document size. This can be useful
when you want to check fine details on a small document.

1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2
3
4
5

From the Paper tab.

or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result.

1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2
3

From the Basic tab, select the paper orientation.

4
5

From the Double-sided Printing section, select the binding option
you want.
Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
Click OK and print the document.

NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should complete
the printing job manually. The printer prints every other page of the
document first. After printing the first side of your job, the Printing Tip
window appears. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the
printing job.

21
Advanced Printing

Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page.
Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
Click OK and print the document.

Editing a Watermark

Using Watermarks
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document.
For example, you may want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT”
or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages
of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the printer, and
they can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.

1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2

From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark dropdown list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.

3

Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current
Watermaks list and change the watermark message and options.

4
5

Click Update to save the changes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

Using an Existing Watermark
1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2

Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the
Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in
the preview image.

3

Click OK and start printing.

Deleting a Watermark
1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2

From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark dropdown list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.

3

Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current
Watermaks list and click Delete.

4

Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when it is
printed.

Creating a Watermark
1

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

2

From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark dropdown list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.

3

Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can
enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview
window.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on
the first page only.

4

Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font
Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from
the Message Angle section.

5
6

Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermaks list.
When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the
Print window.

To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark dropdown list.

22
Advanced Printing

Using a Page Overlay

Using Overlays

After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your
document. To print an overlay with a document:

What is an Overlay?
Dear ABC

Regards
WORLD BEST

An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive
(HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and
letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can
create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently
on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you
do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need
only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document.

1
2

Create or open the document you want to print.

3
4
5

Click the Advanced tab.

If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down
list, select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file
you want to use.

After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay
List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the
Overlay List box.

To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing
your logo or image.

1

Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a
new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to
appear when printed as an overlay.

2

To save the document as an overlay, access printer properties. See
“Printing a Document” on page 13.

3

From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Text drop-down list.
The Edit Overlay window appears.

4
5

In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.

6
7

Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.

If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external
source, you can also load the file when you access the Load
window.

Creating a New Page Overlay

WORLD BEST

To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

6

If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the
overlay automatically prints with your document.

7

In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in
the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The
default is C:\Formover.)
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.

If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If
this box is checked, a message window appears each time you
submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to
print an overlay on your document.

Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints on your document.

NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as
that of the document you will print with the overlay.

Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your computer hard
disk drive.

NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the documents
you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.

23
Advanced Printing

Deleting a Page Overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.

1
2
3
4
5
6

In the printer properties window, click the Advanced tab.
Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
Click Delete.
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

4

Using Windows PostScript
Driver

Layout tab
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears
on the printed page.

If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your system CDROM to print a document.
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer features
and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation
program for the Windows PostScript drivers is provided on the supplied
software CD-ROM.

Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access
all of the printer options you need when using your printer. When the
printer properties are displayed, you can review and change the settings
needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your operating
system. This Software User’s Guide shows the Properties window for
Windows XP.
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User’s Guide
may differ depending on the printer in use.

NOTES:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the
printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software
application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer
driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the
current program. To make your changes permanent, make them in
the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows OS,
refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.

Orientation
This option allows you to select the direction in which the
information is printed on a page.
• Portrait: This option prints across the width of the page, letter
style.
• Landscape: This option prints across the length of the page,
spreadsheet style.
• Rotate Landscape: This option allows you to rotate the page, 180
degrees.

Print on Both Sides
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,
decide how you want your document oriented.
• None
• Flip on Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
bookbinding.
• Flip on Short Edge: This option is the type often used with
calendars.
2

2

3

3
2

5

2

3
5

5

3
5

▲ Long Edge

▲ Short Edge

NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,
envelopes, or thick papers. It may result in paper jam and damage
to the machine.

24
Using Windows PostScript Driver

Pages Per Sheet
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of
paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be
reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print
up to 16 pages on one sheet.

Using Help
You can click
from the upper right corner of the window, and then
click on any setting.

Advanced
You can select Paper Size, Graphic, and Document Options.

• Paper/Output: This option allows you to select the size of the
paper loaded in the tray.
• Graphic: This option allows you to adjust the print quality for your
specific printing needs.
• Document Options: This options allow you to set the PostScript
options or printer features.

Paper/Quality tab
You can select paper tray and media type.

• Paper Source: This option allows you to choose which tray to use.
• Media: This option allows you to choose which media to use.

25
Using Windows PostScript Driver

5

Using Direct Printing Utility
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files
without having to open the files.

Printing
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing Utility.

From the Direct Printing Utility window

CAUTION
• HDD should be installed on your machine, to print PDF files using this
program.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print. Deactivate the
printing restriction feature, and retry printing.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password.
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.
• Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing
Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created.
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports the PDF version
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file to print it.

1

From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs →
Samsung Printers → Direct Printing Utility → Direct Printing
Utility.
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk
top.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.

2

Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section and click
Browse.

3

Select the PDF file you will print and click Open.
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.

Overview Direct Printing Utility
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your
printer without having to open the file. It sends data through the Windows
spooler using the port of the printer driver. It only supports PDF format.
To installing this program, you should select Custom installation and
put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver.

4
5

Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the next column.
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using the shortcut icon
1

Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to the
Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.

NOTE : If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,
the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer
opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.

2
3

Customize the printer settings for your needs.
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using the right-click menu
1

Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct Printing.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added.

2
3
4

Select the printer you will use.
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the below part.
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

26
Using Direct Printing Utility

6

Sharing the Printer Locally
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer, which is
called “host computer,” on the network.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows OS, refer
to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.

NOTES:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer.
Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications
in your Printer User’s Guide.

Setting Up a Host Computer
1
2
3
4
5
6

Start Windows.
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes.
Double-click your printer driver icon.
From the Printer menu, select Sharing.
Check the Share this printer box.
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the
supplied CD-ROM.

Setting Up a Client Computer
1
2

27
Sharing the Printer Locally

Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore.
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search for
Computers.

3

Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name field,
and click Search. (In case host computer requires User name and
Password, fill in User ID and password of host computer account.)

4
5
6

Double-click Printers and Faxes.
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect.
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.

7

Scanning

Scanning Using SmarThru Office

Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital
files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the files, display them
on your web site or use them to create projects that you can print using
Samsung SmarThru software or the WIA driver.
This chapter includes:
•

Scanning Using SmarThru Office

•

Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software

•

Scanning Using the WIA Driver

Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for your
machine. You can use SmarThru Office to scan images or documents
from local or network scanners.

Starting SmarThru Office
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office:

NOTES:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your
printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-ROM.
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon
various factors, including computer speed, available disk space,
memory, the size of the image being scanned, and bit depth
settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are
scanning, you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,
especially using enhanced dpi.

1

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and
properly connected to each other.

2

Once you have installed SmarThru Office, you will see the
SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.

3

Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.

4

The SmarThru Office appears.
For more information, click Help > SmarThru Office Help.

Quick Start Guide
This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct buttons
include: Categories, Binder, Life Cycle, Scan and OCR, Fix and
Enhance, and Samsung Website. You can disable this menu by
checking “Do not show this diaglog again”.

Using SmarThru Office
Scanning

1

Click Scan icon.

NOTES:
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru Office
launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to easily open the Scan
Setting window.

• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the
SmarThru Office icon

28
Scanning

in the tray area of the windows taskbar

1
2
3

to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.

Select File > Send to > Send By E-mail.
An email client opens.
Type in necessary information and send your email.

Fax

2

You can send emails while working on SmarThru Office.

Scan Setting window opens.

1
2
3

Select File > Send to > Send By Fax.
Send Fax window opens.
Type in necessary information and click Send Fax.

NOTE: For more information about SmarThru Office, click Help >
SmarThru Office Help. The SmarThru Office Help window appears;
you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program.

Uninstalling SmarThru Office
NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all applications are

• Select Scanner: Allows you to select between the Local or
Network scanner.

closed on your computer.

• Select Profile: Allows you to save settings frequently used for
future use. Click New Profile to save the setting.

1

From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs →
Samsung Printers → SmarThru Office → Uninstall SmarThru
Office.

2

When your computer asks you to confirm, read the statement and
click OK.

3

Click Finish.

• Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size
and Paper Source.
• Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name and
location to send scanned data.

NOTE: Click Advanced button to set more scan options.

3

Set scan settings and click Scan.
For more information, click Help > SmarThru Office Help.

Scan To
FTP
You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru
Office.

1
2
3

Select File > Send to > Send By FTP.
Send By FTP window opens.
Add your file and click Upload.

Email
You can send email while working on SmarThru Office.

NOTE : You need an email client program, such as Outlook Express,
to send email in SmarThru Office. Procedure for sending email may
differ depending on email client program you are using.

29
Scanning

Scanning Process with TWAINenabled Software
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will need to use
TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop. The first time
you scan with your machine, select it as your TWAIN source in the
application you use.

2

Click Next.

7

Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied
to your computer.

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and
properly connected to each other.

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

2

Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound →
Scanners and Cameras.

3

Click on Scan a document or picture. Then Windows Fax and
Scan application is opened automatically.

OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.

3
4
5

Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to
save the picture.

Windows Vista
1

The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:

1

5
6

Open an application, such as Photoshop.

NOTE:
• To view scanners, user can click on View scanners and cameras.
• If there is not Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint
program and click From Scanner or Camera... on File menu.

Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
Scan and save your scanned image.

NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for acquiring an
image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the application.

4
5

Click Scan and then scan driver is opened.

6

Click Scan.

Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.

Scanning Using the WIA Driver
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel button on
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver
for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided
by Microsoft® Windows® XP and works with digital cameras and
scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan
and easily manipulate images without using additional software.

NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/7

the Scanners and Cameras Wizard.

Windows 7
1

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR

with USB port.

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

2

Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound →
Devices and Printers.

3

Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and
Faxes → Start Scan. New Scan application appears.

4

Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.

5

Click Scan.

Windows XP/Server 2003
1

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.

2

From the Start menu on your desktop window, select Settings,
Control Panel, and then Scanners and Cameras.

3

Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and Camera
Wizard launches.

4

Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how
your preferences affect the picture.

30
Scanning

8

Using Smart Panel

NOTES:

Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the status of
the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s settings. If you are
a Windows or Macintosh OS user, Smart Panel is installed automatically
when you install the printer software. If you are a Linux OS user,
download Smart Panel from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/
printer) and install.

NOTES:
• To use this program, you need:
- Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with
your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher
- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your
printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML
Help.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the
supplied CD-ROM.

Understanding Smart Panel
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears automatically,
showing the error.
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart
Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area
(in Linux). You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X).

• If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer, first
select the printer model you want in order to use the corresponding
Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X)
the Smart Panel icon and select your printer name.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this Software
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or Operating
System in use.
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer, the
level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s) and various other
information. You can also change settings.

1

1 Toner Level
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s).
The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Any printers do
not have this feature.

Buy Now
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.

Troubleshooting Guide
You can view Help to solve problems.

Double-click this icon in Windows.

Driver Setting (Only for Windows)
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access
all of the printer options you need for using your printer. For details,
See “Printer Settings” on page 14.
Click this icon in Mac OS X.

Click this icon in Linux.

If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select Programs or All
Programs → your printer driver name → Smart Panel.

31
Using Smart Panel

Opening the Troubleshooting Guide
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for error status
problems.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel
icon and select Troubleshooting Guide.

Changing the Smart Panel Program
Settings
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel
icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options
window.

32
Using Smart Panel

9

Using Your Printer in Linux

Installing the Unified Linux Driver

You can use your machine in a Linux environment.

Installing the Unified Linux Driver
This chapter includes:
•

Getting Started

•

Installing the Unified Linux Driver

•

Using the Unified Driver Configurator

•

Configuring Printer Properties

•

Printing a Document

•

Scanning a Document

1

Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer. Turn
both the computer and the machine on.

2

When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.

NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.

Getting Started

3

From the Samsung website, download and unpack the Unified
Linux Driver package to your computer.

4

Click the
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in:
[root@localhost root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/
UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz[root@localhost root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/
Linux[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh

You need to download Linux software package from the Samsung
website (www.samsung.com/printer) to install the printer softwares.
Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner
drivers, providing the ability to print documents and scan images. The
package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine
and further processing of the scanned documents.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver package
allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via fast ECP parallel
ports and USB simultaneously.
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the same local
or network machine devices, sent by e-mail, uploaded to an FTP site, or
transferred to an external OCR system.
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible
installation program. You don't need to search for additional components
that might be necessary for the Unified Linux Driver software: all required
packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically;
this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones.

33
Using Your Printer in Linux

NOTE: If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the
software, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the steps 3
to 4, and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen.

5

When the welcome screen appears, click Next.

6

When the installation is complete, click Finish.

Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver
1

When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.

NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.

2

Click the
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in:
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh

The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator
desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver group to the system
menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the
onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can
otherwise be called from the driver package windows applications,
such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager.

NOTE: Installing the driver in the text mode:
• If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the driver
installation, you have to use the driver in the text mode.
• Follow the step 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./install.sh,
than follow the instruction on the terminal screen. Then the
installation completes.
• When you wan to uninstall the driver, follow the installation instruction
above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./uninstall.sh on the terminal
screen.

34
Using Your Printer in Linux

3
4

Click Uninstall.

5

Click Finish.

Click Next.

Printers Configuration

Using the Unified Driver Configurator
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device combines the
printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver Configurator provides
options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions. There is also
a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an
MFP printer and scanner via a single I/O channel.
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.

Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.

Printers Tab
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the
printer icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator
window.
Switches to Printer
configuration.

Shows all of the
installed printer.

Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
1

Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung
Unified Driver and then Unified Driver Configurator.

2

Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the
corresponding configuration window.

Printers Configuration button

Shows the status,
model name and URI of
your printer.

You can use the following printer control buttons:
• Refresh: renews the available printers list.

Scanners Configuration button

• Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.
• Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.

Ports Configuration button

• Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default printer.
• Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.
• Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is
working properly.
• Properties: allows you to view and change the printer properties.
For details, see page 37.

You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help.

3

After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified
Driver Configurator.

35
Using Your Printer in Linux

Classes Tab

Ports Configuration

The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.

In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status
of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner
is terminated for any reason.

Shows all of the
printer classes.

Switches to
ports
configuration.

Shows the status of the class
and the number of printers in
the class.

• Refresh : Renews the classes list.

Shows all of the
available ports.

Shows the port type,
device connected to the
port and status

• Refresh : Renews the available ports list.

• Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.

• Release port : Releases the selected port.

• Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.

Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners

Scanners Configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a
list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device properties, and
scan images.

Switches to
Scanners
configuration.

Shows all of the
installed scanners.

Shows the vendor, model
name and type of your
scanner.

• Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties and scan
a document. See page 38.
• Drivers... : Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers.

36
Using Your Printer in Linux

Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port
or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more than one device
(printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of
“consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port
sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner
drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called MFP ports. The
current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports
Configuration. The port sharing prevents you from accessing one
functional block of the MFP device, while another block is in use.
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is strongly
recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver
Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the new
device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP’s
functionality. For MFP scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner
drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.

Configuring Printer Properties

Printing a Document

Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you
can change the various properties for your machine as a printer.

1

Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.

2
3

Select your machine on the available printers list and click
Properties.

Printing from Applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from
using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your
machine from any such application.

1

From the application you are using, select Print from the File
menu.

2
3

Select Print directly using lpr.

The Printer Properties window opens.

In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine
from the Printer list and click Properties.

Click.

The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
• General: allows you to change the printer location and name.
The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in
Printers configuration.
• Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If you
change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in
use, you must re-configure the printer port in this tab.

4

Change the printer and print job properties.

• Driver: allows you to view or select another printer driver. By
clicking Options, you can set the default device options.
• Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the
selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to
see previous jobs on the job list.
• Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click Add to
Class to add your printer to a specific class or click Remove
from Class to remove the printer from the selected class.

4

Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties
Window.

The following four tabs display at the top of the window.
• General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper type,
and the orientation of the documents, enables the duplex feature,
adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages
per sheet.

37
Using Your Printer in Linux

• Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the text
options, such as spacing or columns.
• Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used when
printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or image
position.
• Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper source, and
destination.

5
6
7

Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.

Scanning a Document
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.

1
2
3

Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
Click the

button to switch to Scanners Configuration.

Select the scanner on the list.

Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of
your print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
Click your
scanner.

Printing Files
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine
device using the standard CUPS way - directly from the command line
interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do that. But the drivers
package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly
LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:

1

Type lpr  from the Linux shell command line and
press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and
click Open.

2

When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the
computer and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is
automatically selected.

In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list, and
change the printer and print job properties.

If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer, you
can select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while
acquisition is in progress on the first scanner, you may select the
second scanner, set the device options and start the image
acquisition simultaneously.

For details about the properties window, see page 37.

3

Click OK to start printing.

38
Using Your Printer in Linux

4
5

Click Properties.

6

Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.

Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF (Automatic
Document Feeder) or face down on the document glass.

The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the
Preview Pane.

11

Select the file directory where you want to save the image and
enter the file name.

12

Click Save.

Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning.
To save a new Job Type setting:

1
2
3
4

Drag the pointer to set
the image area to be
scanned.

Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
Click Save As.
Enter the name for your setting.
Click OK.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.

To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:

7

1

Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down
list.

Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area
sections.

2

The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved
setting is automatically selected for the scan job.

• Image Quality: allows you to select the color composition and
the scan resolution for the image.

To delete a Job Type setting:

• Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The Advanced
button enables you to set the page size manually.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select
from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about the preset Job
Type settings, see page 39.

8

Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down
list.

2

Click Delete.
The setting is deleted from the list

You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking
Default.

Using the Image Manager

When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.

The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and
tools to edit your scanned image.

The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show
you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel.

9

1

The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager tab.
Use these tools to
edit the image.

You can use the following tools to edit the image:
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. For further
details about editing an image, see page 39.

10

Tools

Function
Saves the image.

When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.

39
Using Your Printer in Linux

Tools

Function
Cancels your last action.

Restores the action you canceled.

Allows you to scroll through the image.

Crops the selected image area.

Zooms the image out.

Zooms the image in.
Allows you to scale the image size; you can enter
the size manually, or set the rate to scale
proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.
Allows you to rotate the image; you can select the
number of degrees from the drop-down list.
Allows you to flip the image vertically or
horizontally.
Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of
the image, or to invert the image.
Shows the properties of the image.

For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the
onscreen help.

40
Using Your Printer in Linux

10

Using Your Printer with a
Macintosh
Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB interface
or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When you print a file from
a Macintosh computer, you can use the PostScript driver by installing the
PPD file.

Installing Software
The PostScript driver CD-ROM that came with your machine provides
you with the PPD file to use the PS driver, Apple LaserWriter driver, for
printing on a Macintosh computer.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a Macintosh
computer.

NOTE: Some printers do not support a network interface. Make

Installing the printer software

sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

1

Connect your machine to the computer using the USB cable or the
Ethernet cable.

This chapter includes:

2
3

Turn on your computer and the machine.

4

Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.

5
6
7
8
9

Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.

•

Installing Software

•

Setting Up the Printer

•

Printing

•

Scanning

Insert the supplied software CD-ROM which came with your
machine into the CD-ROM drive.

Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
Enter the password and click OK.
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended
for most users. All components necessary for machine operations
will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual
components to install.

10

When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.

11

After the installation is finished, click Quit.

NOTE: If you have installed scan driver, click Restart.

Uninstalling the printer software
1

Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the CD-ROM
drive.

2

Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.

3
4
5
6
7

Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.

41
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
Enter the password and click OK.
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.

8

When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.

9

When the uninstall is done, click Quit.

Setting Up the Printer
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use
to connect the printer to your computer—the network cable or the USB
cable.

For a Network-connected
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network interface. Before
connecting your printer, make sure that your printer supports a
network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your
Printer User’s Guide.

1

Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41 to install
the PPD file on your computer.

2

Open the Applications folder → Utilities, and Print Setup Utility.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from the
Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax.

3

Click Add on the Printer List.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “+” icon then a display window
will pop up.

4

For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
• For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP.

5

Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing
performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer
Type option.

6
7
8

Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field.
Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot
determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the
default queue first.
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model
Name.
• For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Select a driver to use... and your printer name in Print
Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default
printer.

9

42
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Click Add.

For a USB-connected
1

Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41 to install
the PPD file on your computer.

2

Open the Applications folder → Utilities, and Print Setup Utility.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from the
Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax.

3

Click Add on the Printer List.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “+” icon then a display window
will pop up.

4

For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.
• For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB
connection.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB
connection.

5
6

Select your printer name.
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model
Name.
• For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Select a driver to use... and your printer name in Print
Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default
printer.

7

Click Add.

43
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Changing Printer Settings

Printing

You can use advanced printing features when using your printer.

NOTES:

From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu. The
printer name which appears in the printer properties window may differ
depending on the printer in use. Except for the name, the composition of
the printer properties window is similar.

• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer in use. However the
composition of the printer properties window is similar.
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-ROM.

NOTES: The setting options may differ depending on printers and
Macintosh OS version.

Printing a Document

Layout

When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer software
setting in each application you use. Follow these steps to print from a
Macintosh.

The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears
on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the
following features.

1
2
3

Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in
some applications).
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other options and
click OK.

Make sure that your
printer is selected.

▲ Mac OS 10.5

▲ Mac OS 10.5

4
5

Open the File menu and click Print.

6

Click Print when you finish setting the options.

Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages
you want to print.

• Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many pages
printed on one page. For details, see “Printing Multiple Pages on
One Sheet of Paper” on page 47.
• Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction on a page
as like the examples on UI.
• Border: This option allows you to print a border around each
page on the sheet.
• Two-Sided: This option allows you to print on both sides of a
paper. (See “Printing on both sides of paper” on page 47.)
• Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate
paper 180 degrees.

44
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Graphics

Job Accounting

The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution. Select
Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the
graphic features.

This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the
password.

▲ Mac OS 10.5

• Resolution: You can select the printing resolution. The higher the
setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics.
The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a
document.

Paper

▲ Mac OS 10.5

Job Setting
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file
by using the HDD.

Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which
you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load
a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type.

▲ Mac OS 10.5

▲ Mac OS 10.5

• Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is for
printing without saving the printing file in the optional HDD.
• User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.
• Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.

45
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Printer Settings

Optional Finisher

This option allows you to extend the life of your toner cartridge and
reduces the cost per page without a significant reduction in print
quality.

▲ Mac OS 10.5

▲ Mac OS 10.5

Printer Features
Printer Features tab provides Reverse Duplex Printing and Fit to
Page options. Select Printer Features from the drop-down list under
Orientation to access the following features.

• Staple: Do the stapling on the printouts.
• Request Offset: If you want the printouts to be sorted the same
way as the original, the machine places printout sets slightly offset
from one another.

Advanced Options

▲ Mac OS 10.5

• Reverse Duplex Printing: This option allows you to select
general print order compared to duplex print order. If this option
does not appear, your machine does not have this feature.
• Fit to Page: This setting allows you to scale your print job to any
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small
document.

46
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of
Paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This
feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.

1
2

From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the
Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you
want to print on one sheet of paper.

Printing on both sides of paper
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex
mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document.
The binding options are, as follows:
• Long-edge binding: This option is the conventional layout used
in book binding.
• Short-edge binding: This option is the type often used with
calendars.

1
2
3
4
5

From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
Select a binding orientation from Two-Sided option.
Select the other options you want to use.
Click Print, and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.

▲ Mac OS 10.5

3
4

Select the other options you want to use.
Click Print, then machine prints the selected number of pages you
want to print on one sheet of paper.
▲ Mac OS 10.5

CAUTION: If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the
second copy might print on same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both
sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy.

47
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

NOTE: Refer to Scan Manager for Change Port.. use. (See "Setting

Scanning

scan information in Scan Manager" on page 48.)

You can scan documents using Image Capture program. Macintosh OS
offers Image Capture program.

For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6:
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your
machine in Bonjour Devices.

Scanning with USB
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.

2

Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.

3

Start Applications and click Image Capture.

6
7

Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.

NOTES:

NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message appears,
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists,
please refer to the Image Capture’s help.

4
5

If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps
above.

Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.

NOTES:
• For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.

Scanning with network
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.

2

Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.

3
4
5

Start Applications and click Image Capture.

• For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.

Setting scan information in Scan Manager
To find out about Scan Manager program information, to check the
installed scan driver's condition, to change scan settings. and to add or
delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in
Scan Manager program, follow these instructions:

1
2
3
4

From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar, click Scan Manager.

5

When done, press OK.

Click Devices and click Browse Devices.
For Mac OS X 10.4:
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use
TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click Connect.
• If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select
port.
• If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click Change
Port.. to select port.

48
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Select the appropriate machine from the Scan Manager .
Press Properties.
Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan
settings, to add or delete application programs, and to format files.
You can change the scanning machine by using Change port.
(Local or Network)

Software section

Index
A
advanced printing, use 19
Advanced properties, set 17

installing
Linux software 33

L
B
Basic properties, set
Windows 15
booklet printing 20

C
canceling
scan 30

D
document, print
Macintosh 44
Windows 13
double-sided printing 21
duplex printing
print 24

F
favorites settings, for printing 17
favorites settings, use 17

Linux
driver, install 33
printer properties 37
printing 37
scanning 38

M
Macintosh
driver
install 41
printing 44
scanning 48
setting up the printer 42
MFP driver, install
Linux 33

N
n-up printing
Macintosh 47
Windows 19

O
G
Graphics properties, set 16

H
help, use 18, 25

I
install
printer driver
Macintosh 41
Windows 5

orientation, print 37
Windows 15
overlay
create 23
delete 23
print 23

P
Paper properties, set 15
paper size, set
print 37
paper source, set 38
paper tray, set
49

copy 26
paper type, set
print 37
poster, print 20
PostScript driver
installing 24
print
document 13
fit to page 21
from Macintosh 44
from Windows 13
N-up
Macintosh 47
Windows 19
overlay 23
poster 22
PRN 14
scaling 21
watermark 22
print resolution 38
printer driver, install
Linux 33
printer preferences
using help 17
printer properties
Linux 37
printer properties, set
Macintosh 44
Windows 14, 24
printer software
install
Macintosh 41
Windows 5
uninstall
Windows 12
printing
booklets 20
double-sided 21
from Linux 37
printing on both sides of paper
Windows 24

R
resolution

printing 38

S
scanning
Linux 38
SmarThru 28
TWAIN 30
WIA driver 30
scanning from Macintosh 48
setting
favorites 17
toner save 17
true-type option 16
Smart Panel, use 31
software
install
Macintosh 41
Windows 5
reinstall
Windows 11
system requirements
Macintosh 41
uninstall
Windows 12

T
toner save, set 17
TWAIN, scan 30

U
uninstall, software
Windows 12
uninstalling
MFP driver
Linux 34

W
watermark
create 22
delete 22
edit 22
print 22
WIA, scan 30

50



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2010:06:19 12:52:55Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Modify Date                     : 2010:06:19 14:46:33+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:06:19 14:46:33+09:00
Document ID                     : uuid:d7f9f2fc-0e3c-43a9-8f3d-218561c54aa5
Instance ID                     : uuid:3582a26a-a957-4c4d-9380-bb6eb141cc61
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : SCX6545N-Guide_EN.book
Creator                         : hj9911.kim
Page Count                      : 190
Author                          : hj9911.kim

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools